What is MidJourney?

There’s no shortage of AI image generators on the market, and the number seems to be going up every day. However, there exists a core group of the best and most versatile image generators on the web like DALL-E, Stable Diffusion, Copilot Image Creator, and more. MidJourney is one of them. This image generator has been on the market for quite some time. If you’re curious about what MidJourney is and why you should use it, here’s a guide to explain all of the ins and outs.
We’ll go over any questions that you may have about this image generator. For all you know, this could be your new favorite image generator. One thing to note is that this article will be updated with new information as it comes out, so you’ll want to check back every now and then for any updates. So, without further ado, let’s dive right in.
What is MidJourney?
MidJourney, just like other AI image generators, can create images based on text prompts. So, all you have to do is type a description of what image you want to be created. It can be brief like “cat in space”. However, you could also be long-winded like “cat with gray fur floating in space with planets, comets, and stars in the background, blue aesthetic”. MidJourney will do its best to create an image matching the exact description you gave.
Do I need an account?
Yes. In order to create an account with MidJourney, you will need a Discord account. You will use your Discord account to sign into your MidJourney account. For the time being, there doesn’t seem to be any other way to log in to the platform.
So, there’s no traditional method of signing up such as using an email and password or through another account (Google, Apple, Microsoft, etc.).
Does MidJourney cost money?
Yes, it does. When you make your account, you will have 25 free prompts. These prompts do not replenish after a period of time. If you want access to more prompts, then you will need a subscription.
In order to get a subscription, you will need to go to the bottom left of the homepage of the MidJourney website and click on your profile button. It will show your email address. In the pop-up menu, you will see the Manage Subscription option. There, you’ll see the option for subscription tiers to try out. Right now, there are four subscription tiers for you to choose from.
The first option is the Basic plan, and it costs $10/month ($96/year). It will give you 200 prompts every month. You’ll also gain general commercial rights to use the images you create, access to the member gallery, optional credit top-ups, and three concurrent fast jobs (Fast jobs will be explained later in the article).
Next, the Standard plan costs $30/month ($288/year). This plan gives you unlimited image generations in Relax mode. However, you also get access to 15 hours of Fast Mode generations (Relax Mode and Fast Mode will be explained later in the article). You will get these perks along with all of the perks in the basic plan.
The next plan is the Pro plan. This one costs $60/month ($576/year). Along with all of the aforementioned perks, you get 30 hours of Fast Mode generations and 12 concurrent fast jobs. Also, you get Stealth Mode (explained later in the article).
Last but not least, we have the Mega plan. This plan costs $96/month ($1,152/year). Alongside the aforementioned perks, you get 60 hours of Fast Mode generations.
Concurrent fast jobs, Fast Mode, Relax Mode, Turbo Mode, and Stealth Mode
Some of the perks mentioned above require a little bit of explanation.
Fast Mode
MidJourney doesn’t generate one image at a time, but it generates four. Each time you generate a group of four images, it’s referred to as a “Job”.
MidJourney, just like most other AI companies, uses an army of powerful GPUs to generate the jobs. It takes time for these GPUs to generate them. Typically, it takes the GPUs about one minute to fully generate a job. Since MidJourney has a ton of users, there is usually a long queue of people waiting to have them generated.
In Fast Mode, your prompt is pushed past the queue of waiting users and generated as soon as possible. Depending on the subscription tier you have, you will get a certain number of hours each month that you can use in Fast Mode. Each time you generate a job, it eats away at that monthly allowance.
For example, if you have the Standard plan, you have 15 hours of fast generation time each month. So, each job you do in Fast Mode will eat away from that 15-hour allowance. Since each job takes about one minute, that equates to approximately 900 jobs each month. However, your results will vary.
Once you sign up for your subscription tier, you will automatically be put into Fast Mode. So, all of your jobs will be generated as soon as possible.
Relax Mode
People on the free trial and people on the Standard, Pro, and Mega subscription tiers will have access to Relax Mode. Fast Mode gives you priority access to GPUs so that your prompt will start generating right away. However, Relax Mode will put you in a queue waiting to have your prompt generated. You’re basically put on a waitlist until GPUs become available to generate your prompt. According to the company, if you’re in Relax Mode, your job could take up to 10 minutes to generate.
If you have a basic plan, you will only have access to Fast Mode. Once you have used all of your Fast-Mode jobs, you will not be able to generate any more images until the next month. However, with the other subscription tiers, after you’ve used all of your Fast Mode generations, you will be knocked back to Relax Mode. That may be a bummer, but you will be able to generate unlimited images in this mode.
Your place in the queue will depend on how often you use Relax Mode. If you’ve only generated a few jobs in Relax Mode, you will be further ahead in the queue compared to a person who’s generated hundreds of images. It’s a way of giving newcomers better access to the service.
Concurrent fast jobs
Certain subscription tiers will give you access to a certain number of concurrent fast jobs. Depending on your subscription tier, you’ll only be able to generate a certain number of fast jobs at the same time. Going back to the Standard plan, you can only have up to three fast jobs generating at the same time.
Turbo Mode
Turbo Mode is an even faster version of Fast Mode. Using Turbo Mode, your job will be using an experimental GPU pool. This will create the generations about four times faster than the generations created in Fast Mode. However, this will double how fast you use your Fast Mode time allowance. So, every minute that passes will eat away two minutes of your monthly allowance.
Stealth Mode
If you want to generate images, but you don’t want other people to see them, you can use Stealth Mode. However, there is a big caveat. When using stealth mode, this will only prevent people from seeing your artwork on MidJourney.com. However, people will still be able to see your work when you generate images on public channels.
Also, images that you generate in stealth mode will still be subject to MidJourney’s terms of service. This means MidJourney could still block prompts that could generate inappropriate or illegal content.
When you are generating images, you will input certain commands. Three of the commands you can use will dictate the speed of the generation. One of the commands is the “Fast” command. Putting in the fast command will put you into Fast Mode. The same goes for Relax Mode and Turbo Mode.
Can I buy more hours of Fast Mode?
Yes. If you want to purchase additional Fast Mode time, you can do so from your account page. It costs $4/hour.
How do I access MidJourney?
There are two ways to access MidJourney. Firstly, there is the MidJourney website. Using the website, you can access your account. You will mostly go to the website to see all of the images you generated and manage your account. Also, on the homepage, you will see a grid of hundreds of examples of creations that other people have made.
However, for the time being, you cannot generate images using the website. You will see a text box at the top of the website where you will be able to type prompts. But, that functionality is unavailable for now.
How do you generate images? Well, this is where the second method comes in. You can access MidJourney through the MidJourney Discord. When you join the Discord, you’ll be able to join one of the many channels dedicated to generating images.
How do I use MidJourney?
Using this image generator is pretty simple. Firstly, go to any of the newbie channels or the general Image Gen channel on the MidJourney Discord. This is where your images will be generated. When you enter one of the channels, you will most likely see a long feed of images from other people that have been generated. Also, you are likely to see images being generated in real-time.
In order to start generating images, go to a channel and click on the text field. Then, you’re going to input your command. First, type “/” into the text box. When you do that, you will see a list of the commands that you can input appear. Either type the word “imagine” into the text field or click on the option in the drop-down menu.

After that, all you have to do is describe the images you want to be created. Once you do that, you will either be put to the back of the queue (if you’re in Relax Mode) or moved to the front of the queue (if you are in Fast Mode). Upon getting a subscription, you’ll automatically be put into Fast Mode.
If you want to manually enter Relax Mode or Turbo Mode, it’s easy to do so. After you type the “/” into the text field, type which mode you want to be in. For Relax Mode, type “relax”, for Turbo Mode, type “turbo”, and for Fast Mode, type “fast”. After that, you can go ahead and type “/imagine” and start generating your image
Image generation
When you start generating a job, you will see a 2×2 grid of blurry images appear in the chat feed. This is your job being generated. Over the course of about a minute, you will see it slowly clarify.

When the job is completely generated, you will see a new chat appear at the bottom of the chat feed. This chat will hold the four versions of the prompt you generated along with the text of the prompt that you used.
If you want to view your generated images in better detail, you can simply click on them. Since this is Discord, it’s extremely easy to download your images.
Managing images after they’ve been generated
Your first time seeing the images will probably be a bit confusing. Under your images, you will see nine blocks. Four of them will have the letter “U” followed by a number. Four of them will have the letter “V” followed by a number. Lastly, the ninth one has a circular arrow icon. These are buttons that you can push to further affect your generated images.

Each one of the buttons corresponds to one of the pictures. So, the first button you see has “U1”, and this one refers to the first image generated. The same thing goes for “V1”.
The “U” stands for Upscale, the “V” stands for Variations, and the circular arrow icon stands for Regenerate. The regenerate button will completely regenerate the prompt and give you four new images. If you tap on one of the upscale buttons, MidJourney will then make a 4K upscaled version of the image you selected.
The variations button will take the image and create four new variations on that one. So, if you really like the first image generated, you can either upscale it to download a higher-quality version of it or create different variations of that image.
Upscaled image
After you’ve upscaled an image, you will see additional buttons appear below it. This may be a bit overwhelming because there are 14 buttons.

The first two buttons are the upscale buttons called Upscale (Subtle) and Upscale (Creative).
Upscale (Subtle) will double the resolution of the image that you generated. This version of the image is much better for sharing. The upscaled image will be almost an exact copy of the original. Any differences would be negligible.
Upscale (Creative) will also double the resolution of your image. However, the outcome will be subtly different. MidJourney will make slight changes to the image.
Vary images
The next two buttons are the Vary buttons. These will make variations of the image.
The first one is called Vary (Subtle). This one will create four different variations of the image with only subtle differences from the original. There will be minute changes to the image while retaining the overall structure.
Next, the Vary (Strong) button will create four variations of the original image. However, using this option will change up the images even more.
Suppose you want a variation of the image, but you only want one section of it to be edited. Well, this is where the Vary (Regional) option comes in. Using this function, you’ll be able to select a section of the image that you want to be varied. Then, it will regenerate the image leaving everything the same except for what’s inside of the region.
Zoom/move images
Under those buttons, you have the Zoom-out buttons. These are pretty self-explanatory. These options will zoom out from your image at the specified magnification and generate the content around the original image.
Under the zoom buttons, you will see a row of arrow buttons. These buttons will nudge the image in the specified Direction. Just like with the zoom-out buttons, MidJourney will generate anything outside of the border of the original image.
Finally, under the arrow buttons, you will see two more buttons. These won’t affect your image. The heart button will signal to MidJourney that you like the generation. That will help the company improve the model. The final button will open that image on the MidJourney website.
How can I use the images I generate?
This is a pretty nuanced topic. If you have an active subscription, then your images are subject to Commercial Use. This means that you own your work, and you can use it however. If you want to use it as the banner for your business or sell it, you can. You own the rights to your work.
However, this is only if you have a subscription. If you are on the free trial, then your work does not fall under Commercial Use. Also, if you are a company that makes more than $1 million/year in revenue, you will need either a Pro or Mega plan to own your work.
Can I edit other people’s work?
Yes. you’ve probably noticed that the same buttons show up for other people’s work along with yours. Well, if you want, you can click on those buttons and manipulate other people’s work. You can upscale, vary, zoom, nudge, and download other people’s generated images.
So, if someone generates an image that you like, and you want to generate your own take on it, you have the right to do so. Just use the same commands that you would use for your own image.
While you can edit and download other people’s work, the original work still belongs to the original generator. So, you don’t technically have the right to use or post the image without their consent.The post What is MidJourney? appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Google is testing a bottom bar in the Google app

Google has a ton of first-party apps, and we’re constantly getting reports of the company switching and changing their UIs. Well, this is continuing with the Google app. According to a new report, Google may be testing a bottom bar in the Google app.
The Google app is the company’s gateway to Google Search on Android phones. It’s more than a bloated search bar. Right now, the company is actually testing a Gemini toggle in the Google app. When you open the app and switch to Gemini mode, you’ll have access to Gemini’s assistant capabilities. You will be able to summon it with a voice command and ask it to perform different tasks within your phone. At this point, Google is looking to make it a proper alternative to Google Assistant.
Google is testing a bottom bar for the Google app
When opening the Google app, we’re used to seeing the search bar up top with our recent searches below. When tapping on the Google icon, we open the Discover page, and it still shows the search bar rather close to the top.
However, according to a new report, the company may be working on bringing the search bar even lower. Looking at the screenshot below, it appears that Google wants to make the search bar a part of the bottom bar. We see the search bar within the same UI element as the tabs on the bottom. It will hover just above the Discover, Search, and Saved tabs.

As smartphones get bigger and taller, we start to appreciate companies doing this more. We can’t deny that it’s pretty tough reaching the top of our nearly 7-inch phones. At this point, phones have the ability to summon the notification shade with simple gestures, shrink the entire display, and bring half of the screen down to accommodate larger displays.
So, it’s clear that companies acknowledge that larger phones can be a bit of a hassle. If you’re a person who uses the Google Search app a lot, and you don’t want to constantly stretch your finger to the top of your phone, then you will love this change.
There’s another change
This change has pretty much been confirmed by Google, as it shows up and screenshots on the Play Store listing for the Google app. In the screenshot above, we see the pill-shaped element surrounding the selected tabs. So, the magnifying glass for the Search tab is inside of a pill-shaped enclosure. This will bring the Google app even more in line with the Material You design language.
It’s a nice little addition to the app. Also, it will help create a more consistent look throughout all of Google’s apps. Even though Material You was introduced back in 2021, the company is still working and tweaking the design of all of its apps to make a fully consistent design language.
At this point, it’s clear that Google is only testing these changes. So, there’s no telling if both of them are going to come to the Google app. We will have to wait for Google to officially confirm this to be sure.The post Google is testing a bottom bar in the Google app appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Sunbird beta to relaunch and rejuvenate iMessage for Android

It’s an app that tried to bring iMessage to Android before but had significant security problems. With a failed attempt early in 2022, the Sunbird beta will relaunch with newly added features and better security.
Sunbird beta (iMessage for Android) will relaunch, getting a second shot with security fixes
Through a press statement issued on its website, Sunbird has revealed its desire to reintroduce iMessage for Android. Following a barrage of criticism, the service was ironically discontinued. And immense lapses in security marred its initial phase.
Sunbird debuted in early 2022 as a way for Android users to experience iMessage functionality on their devices. However, it had several setbacks when people discovered some gaps within its system like publicly accessible shared media and real-time messages among other things. After this happened, the service stopped functioning forever.
A press release says that Sunbird is returning to the market with more focus on privacy and safety precautions. The company has made significant changes in its systems such as replacing older architecture with AV2 architecture that focuses on secure messaging protocols.
According to Sunbird, this new architecture uses an MQTTS message broker that complies with OASIS standards for secure messaging. In addition, the application will also integrate with RCS via Google Messages just as it did during their previous version under Nothing Chats branding.
The firm makes changes to its staff reorienting its stance toward security
Sunbird has made changes within its organization thus strengthening its stance regarding security matters. The firm engaged CIPHER, which is an independent cyber-security consultancy firm alongside Jared Jordan who was a former Director of Engineering at Google for Gmail as one of its official advisors.
Though admitting that there were indeed security breaches in the past years leading to a loss of faith by customers, Sunbird has chosen to focus on offering security and openness while reinitiating its services. The company’s efforts to fix its flaws and tighten security demonstrate that Sunbird is keen on ensuring secure messaging systems for its users.
Users will closely watch Sunbird’s actions as it comes back into the market and make sure that it complies with strict safety regulations related to personal data and communication privacy.The post Sunbird beta to relaunch and rejuvenate iMessage for Android appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Meta insists acquiring Instagram and WhatsApp wasn’t monopolistic

Meta is fighting the FTC about the WhatsApp and Instagram acquisition, and it has hit the agency with a preemptive strike. While the FTC claims this is a monopolistic business practice, Meta is going after the legal definitions.
The Federal Trade Commission is currently engaged in a legal battle with Meta. The company, previously known as Facebook, is accused of being anti-competitive and creating a monopoly. Meta has essentially requested a Federal Court to junk the FTC’s antitrust lawsuit.
The Instagram and WhatsApp acquisition benefited consumers, claims Meta
Meta has confirmed it has filed a motion for summary judgment in its lawsuit against the US FTC. The company is essentially asking the District Court to dismiss the case because the “FTC has failed to provide evidence to support its claims.”
There are two aspects that Meta urges the court to consider. The company believes the FTC won’t be able to prove what it claims is the relevant market in the case. In simpler terms, Meta insists that it did not become a monopoly after acquiring Instagram and WhatsApp.
On the contrary, “Meta faces fierce competition from a range of platforms – from TikTok and X to YouTube and Snapchat,” laments the company.

Consumer Watchdog Group Supports Meta’s Move for Summary Judgment in Antitrust Case
WASHINGTON, D.C. – Facebook parent company Meta is moving for summary judgment in the Federal Trade Commission’s (FTC) ongoing litigation against them regarding their acquisition of Instagram and…
— Taxpayers Protection Alliance (@Protectaxpayers) April 5, 2024

Secondly, Meta insists that acquiring WhatsApp and Instagram did not hurt the market or adversely affect end consumers. The company stresses that it has painstakingly improved these social media platforms.
Meta has reportedly stated that it spent “billions of dollars” and invested “millions of hours” to make the apps, “better, more reliable, and more secure.”
Why is Meta urging the US Court to dismiss its case against the FTC?
Meta insists the FTC has no evidence establishing that the company’s conduct was “exclusionary”. What this essentially means is that Meta claims acquiring Instagram and WhatsApp did not cause harm to its competitors and consumers. In other words, Meta has implied that its actions weren’t detrimental to the competition, and they didn’t negatively affect end users.
It is important to note that back in 2021, DC District Court Judge James Boasberg had accepted Meta’s motion to dismiss FTC’s complaint. However, the judge gave the FTC a chance to file an amended one, which was allowed to move forward.

NetChoice Applauds Meta For New Motion to Halt Biden FTC’s Anti-Consumer Agenda
WASHINGTON—Today, Meta filed a motion at the U.S. District Court for the District of Columbia, pushing back against the Federal Trade Commission for its lack of evidence in its case against the… pic.twitter.com/xVUvsgdRgV
— NetChoice (@NetChoice) April 5, 2024

The FTC’s amended complaint is far more substantial and detailed than its previous one. However, in its appeal, Meta has targeted the FTC’s market definitions, which it claims are “unreasonably narrow”.
The FTC has excluded platforms such as TikTok and YouTube from its market definitions. Instead, in its complaint, the agency includes only Facebook, Instagram, Snapchat, and MeWe, Meta claims.
Needless to say, Meta’s platforms are way bigger than the other platforms included in the FTC’s market definitions. However, if other big web platforms and companies are included, Meta’s gargantuan stature is somewhat humbled.
The FTC will get a chance to respond. Hence, there should be a lot of back-and-forth in court filings.The post Meta insists acquiring Instagram and WhatsApp wasn’t monopolistic appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Apple Vision Pro gets support for more 8BitDo controllers

The gaming possibilities on your Apple Vision Pro are getting a boost thanks to the support for more 8BitDo controllers. If you’ve been looking for better controller options to play with Apple’s AR headset, you’re in luck.
8BitDo is one of the most popular gaming accessory manufacturers. Its controller options not only get the job done but also come in multiple nostalgic designs reminiscent of classic consoles. Now, a new set of 8BitDo controllers joins the list of peripherals compatible with the Apple Vision Pro. These accessories have Apple approval, which is important so that they work immediately after pairing them via Bluetooth without further complications.
These are the 8BitDo controllers now compatible with Apple Vision Pro
The list of 8BitDo controllers compatible with Apple Vision Pro now includes the following models: Ultimate 2.4G, Pro 2, SN30 Pro, SN30 Pro for Android (Xbox licensed), SN30 Pro+, Lite 2, Lite SE, and N30 Pro 2. Additionally, the company made its Retro Mechanical Keyboard compatible. This means that the new list of supported accessories will enhance both gaming and productivity.
This way, the 8BitDo controller models mentioned above join the list of current MFi accessories already compatible with the Apple Vision Pro. As of today, you can play most iPad games on Apple’s headset. In addition, it supports Xbox Cloud Gaming and Nvidia GeForce Now. Therefore, there is a good catalog of both casual and AAA titles to enjoy.
It’s noteworthy that 8BitDo had already announced in 2023 support for multiple accessories in Apple products. However, it aimed more at the segment of smartphones, tablets, and Mac computers. According to the Engadget report, this was possible thanks to both the iOS 16.3/iPadOS 16.3/tvOS 16.3/macOS 13.2 updates and new controller firmware.
It is already well known that the Apple Vision Pro is not the most comfortable AR headset in the world. This means that it would not be the best idea to use them for long gaming sessions. Even so, it is good to have support for more controller options available, also thinking about future generations.
Source: 8BitDo
The post Apple Vision Pro gets support for more 8BitDo controllers appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Roku wants to overlay ads on your TV via HDMI

Roku, the popular streaming platform, is considering a novel approach to monetize your TV’s HDMI with Ad overlays. The company is exploring the possibility of displaying ads over content received from your HDMI signals.
Roku will overlay ads when you pause video playback on HDMI devices
Several smart TV services have a very low-profit margin when sold with the hope of income generating through advertisements. There is however a problem when external HDMI devices connect to televisions. Since they can bypass the built-in operating system entirely, they break Roku’s business model.
To cope with this challenge, Roku unveiled a patent that looks into the idea of inserting ads on HDMI inputs. It was LowPass that initially spotted this patent. It suggests an avenue for identifying paused content from HDMI sources to display ads during these periods.
Roku’s proposal would involve monitoring video and audio feeds for pauses in the HDMI input stream so that commercials can be placed accordingly. The company cannot communicate directly with devices attached via HDMI. Nonetheless, they may utilize metadata and content detection in customizing adverts for specific content as implied by patent texts.
However, it remains speculative whether or not such ideas will interrupt traditional television-watching experiences with commercial breaks. Per 9to5Google, it is just a patent on possible technology but there is no evidence that Roku possesses the practical means to enact it.
Sticky ads over HDMI are possible since Roku has tried something similar before
The concept of smart TVs potentially being able to monitor our every move is indeed worrying, and it also raises concerns about sticky advertisements. Furthermore, even existing Roku TVs have some suggestions like “more ways to watch” offering over HDMI inputs, which means HDMI ads are more than possible.
However, even with all the speculations surrounding the unveiling of this new advertisement approach; there is no evidence that Roku has developed this feature yet. This application (sic) could eventually materialize into something more tangible especially if history is any indication.
It may be a fresh marketing technique in the form of an abstract presentation of top-layer ad compositions using HMDI integration (sic). With changes in how streaming takes place around us, these are vital issues for companies such as Roku who care about the shift towards ad-supported models.The post Roku wants to overlay ads on your TV via HDMI appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Vivo X100s Pro certified on Google Play Console with key specs

Recent reports suggest that the Vivo X100s and X100s Pro will be the next models in the series. As their names indicate, they will be improved versions of the X100 and X100 Pro that we already know. The arrival of a Vivo X100 Ultra is also expected later.
Previously, the Vivo X100s had been detected on certification platforms, and now it is the turn of the “Pro” model. As spotted by 91 Mobiles, the Vivo X100s Pro is already listed on the Google Play Console. The listing includes some key specifications, and even a render confirming its design.
Here’s what the Google Play Console reveals about the Vivo X100s Pro
The phones in the “Vivo X” series stand out, especially for their impressive cameras, premium design, and high performance. The “s” versions usually arrive a few months later, maintaining all the elements of the original model, but offering a more powerful chip. However, this time the approach may be slightly different.
The Vivo X100s Pro was certified on the Google Play Console with model number PD2324, powered by the MediaTek MT6989 SoC. The chip model refers to the Dimensity 9300, the same hardware present in the original X100 Pro. It’s noteworthy that the base Vivo X100s would also use the same chip.
Anyway, it is also possible that it has the Dimensity 9300 Plus chipset. Previously, the device appeared in Geekbench listings with more CPU details. At that time, there was a difference in the clock speed of its main core (3.4GHz) compared to that of the standard Dimensity 9300 (3.25GHz).
Other specs revealed by the listing include a Mali G720 GPU, Android 14, 16GB of RAM, and a 1260 x 2800 px screen resolution.
This is what the new device looks like
Regarding the design, it seems that it is where the brand will make the least changes. The render shows a look quite similar (or identical) to that of the current X100 series. That is, there is a prominent circular camera module in its rear area with three sensors. The module also includes “ZEISS”, highlighting the nature of its optics and the collaboration with the traditional camera company. The render shows the device in light blue, but it would arrive in at least three colors.
To top it off, there is still no official confirmation of the launch date of the series. However, the report suggests that it could be announced in India alongside the Vivo X Fold 4 and the Vivo Pad 3 this April.

The post Vivo X100s Pro certified on Google Play Console with key specs appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

OSI participates in Columbia Convening on openness and AI; first readouts available

I was invited to join Mozilla and the Columbia Institute of Global Politics in an effort that explores what “open” should mean in the AI era. A cohort of 40 leading scholars and practitioners from Open Source AI startups and companies, non-profit AI labs, and civil society organizations came together on February 29 at the Columbia Convening to collaborate on ways to strengthen and leverage openness for the good of all. We believe openness can and must play a key role in the future of AI. The Columbia Convening took an important step toward developing a framework for openness in AI with the hope that open approaches can have a significant impact on AI, just as Open Source software did in the early days of the internet and World Wide Web. 

This effort is aligned and contributes valuable knowledge to the ongoing process to find the Open Source AI Definition. 

As a result of this first meeting of Columbia Convening, two readouts have been published; a technical memorandum for technical leaders and practitioners who are shaping the future of AI, and a policy memorandum for policymakers with a focus on openness in AI.

Technical readout

The Columbia Convening on Openness and AI Technical Readout was edited by Nik Marda with review contributions from myself, Deval Pandya, Irene Solaiman, and Victor Storchan.

The technical readout highlighted the challenges of understanding openness in AI. Approaches to openness are falling under three categories: gradient/spectrum, criteria scoring, and binary. The OSI is championing a binary approach to openness, where AI systems are either “open” or “closed” based on whether they meet a certain set of criteria.

The technical readout also provided a diagram that shows how the AI stack may be described by the different dimensions (AI artifacts, documentation, and distribution) of its various components and subcomponents.

Policy readout

The Columbia Convening on Openness and AI Policy Readout was edited by Udbhav Tiwari with review contributions from Kevin Klyman, Madhulika Srikumar, and myself.

The policy readout highlighted the benefits of openness, including:

Enhancing reproducible research and promoting innovation

Creating an open ecosystem of developers and makers

Promoting inclusion through open development culture and models

Facilitating accountability and supporting bias research

Fostering security through widespread scrutiny

Reducing costs and avoiding vendor lock-In

Equipping supervisory authorities with necessary tools

Making training and inference more resource-efficient, reducing environmental harm

Ensuring competition and dynamism

Providing recourse in decision-making

The policy readout also showcased a table with the potential benefits and drawbacks of each component of the AI stack, including the code, datasets, model weights, documentation, distribution, and guardrails.

Finally, the policy readout provided some policy recommendations:

Include standardized definitions of openness as part of AI standards

Promote agency, transparency and accountability

Facilitate innovation and mitigate monopolistic practices

Expand access to computational resources

Mandate risk assessment and management for certain AI applications

Hold independent audits and red teaming

Update privacy legislation to specifically address AI challenges

Updated legal framework to distinguish the responsibilities of different actors

Nurture AI research and development grounded in openness

Invest in education and specialized training programs

Adapt IP laws to support open licensing models

Engage the general public and stakeholders

You can follow along with the work of Columbia Convening at mozilla.org/research/cc and the work from the Open Source Initiative on the definition of Open Source AI at opensource.org/deepdive.

Source: opensource.org

OSI’s Response to NTIA ‘Dual Use’ RFC 3.27.2024

The Open Source Initiative is pleased to share their formal response to the US National Telecommunications and Information Agency (NTIA) Request for Comment on Dual Use Foundation Artificial Intelligence Models with Widely Available Model Weights .  This public call solicits public feedback about how making model weights and other model components widely available creates benefits or risks to the broader economy, communities, individuals, and to national security.  Below, we present the entirety of our letter.

In our response, OSI explores the overarching societal benefits of open models, drawing from the extensive adoption and accomplishments of the open source software development model. We underscore the pivotal role played by the formulation of clearly defined terms and the Open Source Definition, initiated some twenty-five years ago, which has been instrumental in the success of this model. Additionally, we urge the NTIA to take into account ongoing efforts, including the Defining Open Source AI project currently underway with a diverse array of stakeholders under OSI’s stewardship.

In parallel to this initiative, OSI recently collaborated with the Mozilla Foundation, the Center for Democracy & Technology (CDT), and various other Civil Society organizations to co-sign a joint letter addressed to Secretary Gina Raimondo of the Department of Commerce. This letter advocates for the transparency and openness of AI, highlighting its societal benefits.

In February OSI joined other non-profits working in the public interest to share comments, concerns and encouragement in a Listening Session with NTIA staff, a precursor to the RFC which was released in February and closed on March 27, 2024. 

Through these concerted efforts, OSI remains committed to fostering a collaborative environment that promotes transparency, accessibility, and responsible innovation in AI for the betterment of society. We eagerly anticipate further dialogue and progress in this crucial domain.

March 27, 2024

Mr. Bertram LeeNational Telecommunications and Information Administration (NTIA)U.S. Department of Commerce1401 Constitution Avenue NWWashington, DC 20230

RE: [Docket Number 240216-0052] Dual Use Foundation Artificial Intelligence Models with Widely Available Model Weights

Dear Mr. Lee:

The Open Source Initiative (“OSI”) appreciates the opportunity to provide our views on the above referenced matter. As steward of the Open Source Definition1, the OSI sets the foundation for Open Source software, a global public good that plays a vital role in the economy and is foundational for most technology we use today. As the leading voice on the policies and principles of Open Source, the OSI helps build a world where the freedoms and opportunities of Open Source software can be enjoyed by all and supports institutions and individuals working together to create communities of practice in which the healthy Open Source ecosystem thrives. One of the most important activities of the OSI, a California public benefit 501(c)(3) organization founded in 1998, is to maintain the Open Source Definition for the good of the community2.

The OSI is encouraged by the work of NTIA to bring stakeholders together to understand the lessons from the Open Source software experience in having a recognized, unified Open Source Definition that enables an ecosystem whose value is estimated to be worth $8.8 trillion3. As provided below in more detail, it is essential that federal policymakers encourage Open Source AI models to the greatest extent possible, and work with organizations like the OSI which is endeavoring to create a unified, recognized definition of Open Source AI.

The Power of Open Source

Open Source delivers autonomy and personal agency to software users which enables a development method for software that harnesses the power of distributed peer review and transparency of process. The promise of Open Source is higher quality, better reliability, greater flexibility, lower cost, and an end to proprietary lock-in.

Open Source software is widely used across the federal government and in every critical infrastructure sector. “The Federal Government recognizes the immense benefits of Open Source software, which enables software development at an incredible pace and fosters significant innovation and collaboration.”4 For the last two decades, authoritative direction and educational resources have been given to agencies on the use, management and benefits of Open Source software.5

Moreover, Open Source software has direct economic and societal benefits. Open Source software empowers companies to develop, test and deploy services, thereby substantiating market demand and economic viability. Furthermore, it reduces costs for essential applications like databases within these services (Hoffmann, Nagle and Zhou found that firms would need to spend 3.5 times more on software than they currently do if OSS did not exist).6 By leveraging Open Source, companies can accelerate their progress and focus on innovation. Many of the essential services and technologies of our society and economy are powered by Open Source software, including, e.g., the Internet.7

The Open Source Definition has demonstrated that massive social benefits accrue when the barriers to learning, using, sharing and improving software systems are removed. The core criteria of the Open Source Definition – free redistribution; source code; derived works; integrity of the author’s source code; no discrimination against persons or groups; no discrimination against fields of endeavor; distribution of license; license must not be specific to a product; license must not restrict other software; license must be technology-neutral – have given users agency, control and self-sovereignty of their technical choices and a dynamic ecosystem based on permissionless innovation.

A recent study published by the European Commission estimated that companies located in the European Union invested around €1 billion in Open Source Software in 2018, which brought about a positive impact on the European economy of between €65 and €95 billion.8

This success and the potency of Open Source software has for the last three decades relied upon the recognized unified definition of Open Source software and the list of Approved Licenses that the Open Source Initiative maintains.9

OSI believes this “open” analog is highly relevant to Open Source AI as an emerging technology domain with tremendous potential for public benefit.

Distinguishing the Open Source Definition

The OSI Approved License trademark and program creates a nexus of trust around which developers, users, corporations and governments can organize cooperation on Open Source software. However, it is generally agreed that the Open Source Definition, drafted 26 years ago and maintained by the OSI, does not cover this new era of AI systems.

AI models are not just code; they are trained on massive datasets, deployed on intricate computing infrastructure, and accessed through diverse interfaces and modalities. With traditional software, there was a very clear separation between the code one wrote, the compiler one used, the binary it produced, and what license they had. However, for AI models, many components collectively influence the functioning of the system, including the algorithms, code, hardware, and datasets used for training and testing. The very notion of modifying the source code (which is important in the Open Source Definition) becomes fuzzy. For example, there is the key question of whether the training dataset, the model weights, or other key elements should be considered independently or collectively as the source code for the model/weights that have been trained.10

AI (specifically the Models that it manifests) include a variety of technologies, each is a vital element to all Models.11

This challenge is not new. In its guidance on use of Open Source software, the US Department of Defense distinguished open systems from open standards, that while “different from Open Source software, they are complementary and can work well together”12:

Open standards make it easier for users to (later) adopt an Open Source softwareprogram, because users of open standards aren’t locked into a particularimplementation. Instead, users who are careful to use open standards can easilyswitch to a different implementation, including an OSS implementation. … Openstandards also make it easier for OSS developers to create their projects, becausethe standard itself helps developers know what to do. Creating any interface is aneffort, and having a predefined standard helps reduce that effort greatly.

OSS implementations can help create and keep open standards open. An OSSimplementation can be read and modified by anyone; such implementations canquickly become a working reference model (a “sample implementation” or an“executable specification”) that demonstrates what the specification means(clarifying the specification) and demonstrating how to actually implement it.Perhaps more importantly, by forcing there to be an implementation that others canexamine in detail, resulting in better specifications that are more likely to be used.

OSS implementations can help rapidly increase adoption/use of the open standard.OSS programs can typically be simply downloaded and tried out, making it mucheasier for people to try it out and encouraging widespread use. This also pressuresproprietary implementations to limit their prices, and such lower prices forproprietary software also encourages use of the standard.

With practically no exceptions, successful open standards for software have OSSimplementations.13

Towards a Unified Vision of what is ‘Open Source AI’

With these essential differentiating elements in mind, last summer, the OSI kicked off a multi-stakeholder process to define the characteristics of an AI system that can be confidently and generally understood to be considered as “Open Source”.

This collaboration utilizes the latest definition of AI system adopted by the Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD), and which has been the foundation for NIST’s “AI Risk Management Framework”14 as well as the European Union’s AI Act:15

An AI system is a machine-based system that, for explicit or implicit objectives,infers, from the input it receives, how to generate outputs such as predictions,content, recommendations, or decisions that can influence physical or virtualenvironments. Different AI systems vary in their levels of autonomy andadaptiveness after deployment.16

Since its announcement last summer, the OSI has had an open call for papers and held open webinars in order to collect ideas from the community describing precise problem areas in AI and collect suggestions for solutions.17 More than 6 community reviews – in Europe, Africa, and various locations in the US – have taken place in 2023, coinciding with a first draft of the Open Source AI Definition.18 This year, the OSI has coordinated working groups to analyze various foundation models, released three more drafts of the Definition, hosted bi-weekly public town halls to review and continues to get feedback from a wide variety of stakeholders, including:

System Creators (makes AI system and/or component that will be studied, used, modified, or shared through an Open Source license;

License Creators (writes or edits the Open Source license to be applied to the AI system or component; includes compliance;

Regulators (writes or edits rules governing licenses and systems (e.g. government policy-maker);

Licensees (seeks to study, use modify, or share an Open Source AI system (e.g. AI engineer, health researcher, education researcher);

End Users (consumes a system output, but does not seek to study, use, modify, or share the system (e.g., student using a chatbot to write a report, artist creating an image);

Subjects (affected upstream or downstream by a system output without interacting with it intentionally; includes advocates for this group (e.g. people with loan denied, or content creators.

What is Open Source AI?

An Open Source AI is an AI system made available to the public under terms that grant the freedoms to:

Use the system for any purpose and without having to ask for permission.

Study how the system works and inspect its components.

Modify the system for any purpose, including to change its output.

Share the system for others to use with or without modifications, for any purpose.

Precondition to exercise these freedoms is to have access to the preferred form to make modifications to the system.19

The OSI expects to wrap up and report the outcome of in-person and online meetings and anticipates having the draft endorsed by at least 5 reps for each of the stakeholder groups with a formal announcement of the results in late October.

To address the need to define rules for maintenance and review of this new Open Source AI Definition, the OSI Board of Directors20 approved the creation of a new committee to oversee the development of the Open Source AI Definition, approve version 1.0, and set rules for the maintenance of Definition.

Some preliminary observations based on these efforts to date:

It is generally recognized, as indicated above, that the Open Source Definition as created for software does not completely cover this new era of Open Source AI. This is not a software-only issue and is not something that can be solved by applying the same exact terms in the new territory of defining Open Source AI. The Open Source AI definition will start from the core motivation of the need to ensure users of AI systems retain their autonomy and personal agency.

To the greatest degree practical, Open Source AI should not be limited in scope, allowing users the right to adopt the technology for any purpose. One of the key lessons and underlying successes of the Open Source Definition is that field-of-use restrictions deprive creators of software to utilize tools in a way to affect positive outcomes in society.

Reflecting on the past 20-to-30 years of learning about what has gone well and what hasn’t in terms of the open community and the progress it has made, it’s important to understand that openness does not automatically mean ethical, right or just. Other factors such as privacy concerns and safety when developing open systems come into play, and in each element of an AI model – and when put together as a system — there is an ongoing tension between something being open and being safe, or potentially harmful.

Open Source AI systems lower the barrier for stakeholders outside of large tech companies to shape the future of AI, enabling more AI services to be built by and for diverse communities with different needs that big companies may not always address.

Similarly, Open Source AI systems make it easier for regulators and civil society to assess AI systems for compliance with laws protecting civil rights, privacy, consumers, and workers. They increase transparency, education, testing and trust around the use of AI, enabling researchers and journalists to audit and write about AI systems’ impacts on society.

Open source AI systems advance safety and security by accelerating the understanding of their capabilities, risks and harms through independent research, collaboration, and knowledge sharing.

Open source AI systems promote economic growth by lowering the barrier for innovators, startups, and small businesses from more diverse communities to build and use AI. Open models also help accelerate scientific research because they can be less expensive, easier to fine-tune, and supportive of reproducible research.

The OSI looks forward to working with NTIA as it considers the comments to this RFI, and stands ready to participate in any follow on discussions to this or the general topic of ‘Dual Use Foundation Artificial Intelligence Models With Widely Available Model Weights’. As shared above, it is essential that federal policymakers encourage Open Source AI models to the greatest extent possible, and work with organizations like the OSI and others who are endeavoring to create a unified, recognized definition of Open Source AI.

Respectfully submitted,THE OPEN SOURCE INITIATIVE

For more information, contact:

Stefano Maffulli, Executive Director

Deb Bryant, US Policy Director


OSI Response to NTIA ‘Dual Use’ RFC 3.27.2024Download

The Open Source Definition found at https://opensource.org/osd. ︎The OSI is a public charity with no beneficial owners and no corporate controllers, but with 80+ civil society Affiliates working on Open Source. We are incorporated in California, USA, but with a global membership and mission of promoting and defending Open Source software on behalf of the general public and of building bridges within its global community. ︎Hoffmann, Manuel and Nagle, Frank and Zhou, Yanuo, The Value of Open Source Software (January 1, 2024). Harvard Business School Strategy Unit Working Paper No. 24-038, Available at SSRN: https://ssrn.com/abstract=4693148 or http://dx.doi.org/10.2139/ssrn.4693148 ︎Office of the National Cyber Director, Executive Office of the President, Cybersecurity and Infrastructure Security Agency, DHS, National Science Foundation, Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency, and Office of Management and Budget, Executive Office of the President, “Request for Information on Open-Source Software Security: Areas of Long-Term Focus and Prioritization”, August 10,2023, found at: https://www.federalregister.gov/documents/2023/08/10/2023-17239/request-for-information-on-open-source-software-security-areas-of-long-term-focus-and-prioritization. ︎The earliest and most comprehensive such guidance is the “DoD Open Source Software FAQ”, Office of the DoD CIO, dated 2021-10-28, found at:https://dodcio.defense.gov/open-source-software-faq/#frequently-asked-questions-regarding-opensource-software-oss-and-the-department-of-defense-dod. See also, generally, U.S. Digital Services, “Digital Services Playbook” (2014) which encourages a ‘default to open’ policy for federal IT, found at: https://playbook.cio.gov/. ︎“The Value of Open Source Software”, Working Paper 24-038, Harvard Business Review, January 2024, found at: https://www.hbs.edu/ris/Publication%20Files/24-038_51f8444f-502c-4139-8bf2-56eb4b65c58a.pdf. ︎BIND is the most commonly used DNS server software on the Internet. See https://www.isc.org/bind/. See Chinmayi Sharma, “Tragedy of the Digital Commons”, North Carolina Law Review, October 2022, found at: https://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/papers.cfm?abstract_id=4245266 ︎PRESS RELEASE, “Commission publishes study on the impact of Open Source on the European economy”, 06 September 2021, found at: https://digital-strategy.ec.europa.eu/en/news/commission-publishes-study-impact-open-source-european-economy. ︎See https://opensource.org/licenses for a full list. ︎The OSI was a participant in the “Columbia Convening on “Openness and AI”, a recent gathering of over 40 experts and stakeholders in the field of Artificial Intelligence (AI), sponsored by Mozilla and the Columbia Institute of Global Politics. See https://blog.mozilla.org/en/mozilla/ai/introducing-columbia-convening-openness-and-ai/. A Technical Readout (was well as a companion Policy Readout), to be published shortly, explores these and related issues. ︎See NIST, ‘Artificial Intelligence: Overview” at https://www.nist.gov/artificial-intelligence. ︎Office of the Chief Information Officer, U.S. Department of Defense, “DoD Open Source Software FAQ”, found at: https://dodcio.defense.gov/open-source-software-faq/ ︎Ibid. See “Q: How does Open Source software work with open systems/open standards?”, found at: https://dodcio.defense.gov/open-source-software-faq/#q-how-does-open-source-software-work-with-open-systemsopen-standards. ︎Found at: https://nvlpubs.nist.gov/nistpubs/ai/NIST.AI.100-1.pdf. January 2023 by (Adapted from: OECD Recommendation on AI:2019; ISO/IEC 22989:2022)”. ︎“OECD updates definition of Artificial Intelligence ‘to inform EU’s AI Act’”, Euractive.com, November 9, 2023 (updated: November 14, 2023), found at:https://www.euractiv.com/section/artificial-intelligence/news/oecd-updates-definition-of-artificial-intelligence-to-inform-eus-ai-act/. ︎“OECD Recommendation of the Council on Artificial Intelligencehttps://legalinstruments.oecd.org/en/instruments/OECD-LEGAL-0449. ︎A chronology of relevant activity can be followed at:https://opensource.org/deepdive#see_all_we_achieved_in_2023. ︎The Open Source AI Definition – draft v. 0.0.6https://opensource.org/deepdive/drafts/the-open-source-ai-definition-draft-v-0-0-6 ︎The latest drafts can always be found on opensource.org/deepdive/drafts ︎The OSI is managed by a member-elected board of directors that is the ultimate authority responsible for the organization. More information on the OSI board and governance can be found at: https://opensource.org/board. ︎

Source: opensource.org

Open Source AI Definition – Weekly update April 2

Seeking document reviewers for Pythia and OpenCV

We are now in the process of reviewing legal documents to check the compatibility with the version 0.0.6 definition of open-source AI, specifically for Pythia and OpenCV.

Click here to see the past activities of the four working groups

To get involved, respond on the forum or message Mer here.

The data requirement: “Sufficiently detailed information” for what?

Central question: What criteria define “sufficiently detailed information”?

There is a wish to change the term “Sufficiently detailed information” to “Sufficiently detailed to allow someone to replicate the entire dataset” to avoid vagueness and solidify reproducibility as openness

Stefano points out that “reproducibility” in itself might not be a sustainable term due to its loaded connotations.

There’s a proposal to modify the Open Source AI Definition requirement to specify providing detailed information to replicate the entire dataset.

However, concerns arise about how this would apply to various machine learning methods where dataset replication might not be feasible.

Action on the 0.0.6 draft

Contribution concerned with the usage of the wording “deploy” under “Out of Scope Issues” in relation to code alone.

OSI has replied asking for clarification on the question, as “deploy” refers to the whole AI system, not just the code.

Contribution concerned with the wording of “learning, using, sharing and improving software systems” under “Why We Need Open Source Artificial Intelligence”. Specifically, when relating to AI as opposed to “traditional” software, there is a growing concern that these values might be broad compared to the impact, in terms of safety and ethics, AI can have.

OSI replied that while the ethics of AI will continue to be discussed, these discussions are out of the scope of this definition. This will be elaborated on in an upcoming FAQ.

Source: opensource.org

Letter to U.S. Commerce Secretary Raimondo urging protection of openness and transparency in AI

The Open Source Initiative (OSI) contributed, along with other members of civil society and academia, to a letter drafted by Mozilla and the Center for Democracy & Technology (CDT) asking the White House and Congress to exercise great caution when considering whether and how to regulate the publication of open models.

The letter demonstrates how openness allows collaborative efforts to build, shape and test AI for the benefit of all, and speaks of the need for policy, technology and advocacy in creating a better future through trustworthiness and accountability in AI innovation. The letter highlighted three broad points of consensus about openness and transparency in AI:

Open models can provide significant benefits to society, and policy should sustain and expand these benefits.

Policy should be based on clear evidence of marginal risks that open models pose compared to closed models.

Policy should consider a wide range of solutions to address well-defined marginal risks in a tailored fashion.

The letter was sent today, March 25, 2024, in advance of the Department of Commerce’s comment deadline on AI models which closes March 27. You can read the letter below and at CDT’s website.


Source: opensource.org

Open Source AI Definition – Weekly Update Mar 25

The current draft is up for review and comment. Please spread the word with your peers as we are entering the last 2 months of drafting: this is the time to raise concerns and shape the final text of the Open Source AI Definition.

Where to find the description of the “components”

An article regarding the components of machine learning systems has been published by the Linux Foundation team. The paper establishes a ranked classification system that rates machine learning models based on their completeness, following principles of open science, open source, open data, and open access.

The list of components on this paper is what we used for the evaluation of Pythia, Llama2, BLOOM and OpenCV with the working groups.

The default required components went in the 0.0.6 draft definition.

The definitions of these terms are now public and will be cited going forward.

Open Source AI Definition Town Hall – March 22, 2024

If you missed the latest town hall, access the recording through the link above.

Next town hall meeting will be held on the 5th of April

Source: opensource.org

Simpler Licensing with VMware vSphere Foundation and VMware Cloud Foundation 5.1.1

Tweet VMware has been on a journey to simplify its portfolio and transition from a perpetual to a subscription model to better serve customers with continuous innovation, faster time to value, and predictable investments. To that end, VMware recently introduced a simplified product portfolio that consists of two primary offerings: VMware Cloud Foundation, our flagship … Continued

The post Simpler Licensing with VMware vSphere Foundation and VMware Cloud Foundation 5.1.1 appeared first on VMware Support Insider.

Source: vmware

Results of 2024 elections of OSI board of directors

The polls just closed, the results are in. Congratulations to the returning directors Thierry Carrez and Josh Berkus, and the newly elected director Chris Aniszczyk.

Thierry Carrez has been confirmed and joins as a director elected by the Affiliate organizations. Chris Aniszczyk and Josh Berkus collected the votes of the Individual members.

The OSI thanks all of those who participated in the 2024 board elections by casting a ballot and asking questions to the candidates. We also want to extend our sincerest gratitude to all of those who stood for election. We were once again honored with an incredible slate of candidates who stepped forward from across the open source software community to support the OSI’s work, and advance the OSI’s mission. The 2024 nominees were again, remarkable: experts from a variety of fields and technologies with diverse skills and experience gained from working across the open source community. We hope the entire Open Source software community will join us in thanking them for their service and their leadership. We’re better off because of their contributions and commitment, and we thank them.

Next steps

The board of directors has formalized the election results in an ad-hoc meeting and invited the newly elected director to the onboarding meeting.

The complete election results

OSI Affiliate directors elections 2024

There were 6 candidates competing for 1 seat. The number of voters was 38 and there were 38 valid votes and 0 empty ballots.

Counting votes using Scottish STV.

Winner is Thierry Carrez.

Details from affiliates elections.

OSI Individual directors elections 2024

There were 11 candidates competing for 2 seats. The number of voters was 158 and there were 158 valid votes and 0 empty ballots.

Counting votes using Scottish STV.

Winners are Chris Aniszczyk and Josh Berkus.

Details from individuals elections.

Source: opensource.org

Open Source AI Definition – Weekly update Mar 18

Comments on draft 0.0.6 from the forum

Point raised by participant that training data has been listed both as optional and a precondition. This might cause confusion as it is unclear whether we should have the right to access training data or know what training data was used for the model

OSI has added to a line to the checklist about the data transparency requirements.

To contribute, read the new draft here 

Moving on to next steps! Town hall this Friday

We’ll discuss the next steps:

Focus on the availability of the required components (granted by the results of the working groups) and make a list of the legal documents they use

This is to test the current draft Definition and edit accordingly

Click here to access the town hall meeting on Friday 22d of March. 

Comments on definitions under “What is open source AI?”

New definition of code suggested so the model architecture is not an overlapped subset of training, validation, and testing code. Comments point out that without a defined architecture, the training, validation, and testing code cannot load a model correctly.

New definition of model suggested as the model parameters and weights is argued to be the same. 

Still strong debate about access to training data 

There is a fear that this will harm the ecosystem in the long run, as the original work of the model never can be “forked” to improve the model itself.

Source: opensource.org

ClearlyDefined at the ORT Community Days

Once again Bosch’s campus in Berlin received ORT Community Days, the annual event organized by the OSS Review Toolkit (ORT) community. ORT is an Open Source suite of tools to automate software compliance checks.

During this two day event, members from startups like Double Open and NexB, as well as large corporations like Mercedes-Benz, Volkswagen, CARIAD, Porsche, Here Technologies, EPAM, Deloitte, Sony, Zeiss, Fraunhofer, and Roche, came together to discuss best practices around software supply chain compliance.

The ClearlyDefined community had an important presence at the event, represented by E. Lynette Rayle and Lukas Spieß from GitHub and Qing Tomlinson from SAP. I had the pleasure to represent the Open Source Initiative as the community manager for ClearlyDefined. The mission of ClearlyDefined is to crowdsource a global database of licensing metadata for every software component ever published. We see the ORT community as an important partner towards achieving this mission.

Relevant talks

There were several interesting talks at ORT Community Days. These are the ones I found most relevant to ClearlyDefined:

Philippe Ombredanne presented ScanCode, a project of great importance to ClearlyDefined, as we use this tool to detect licenses, copyrights, and dependencies. Philippe gave an overview of the project and its challenges. For ClearlyDefined, we would like to see better accuracy and performance improvements. 

Sebastian Schuberth presented the Double Open Server (DOS) companion for ORT. DOS is a server application that scans the source code of open source components, stores the scan results for use in license compliance pipelines, and provides a graphical interface for manually curating the license findings. I believe there’s an opportunity to integrate DOS with ClearlyDefined by providing access to our APIs to fetch licensing metadata and allowing the sharing of curations.

Marcel Kurzmann and Martin Nonnenmacher presented Eclipse Apoapsis, another ORT server that makes use of its integration APIs for dependency analysis, license scanning, vulnerability databases, rule engine, and report generation. Again, I feel we could also integrate Eclipse Apoapsis with ClearlyDefined the same way as with DOS.

Till Jaeger gave an excellent talk about curation of ORT output from the perspective of FOSS license compliance. He highlighted the Cyber Resilient Act (CRA), which brings legal provisions for SBOMs, and which will likely increase the need for tools like ORT. Till shared the many challenges in the curation process, particularly the compatibility issues from dual licensing, and went on to showcase the OSADL compatibility matrix.

Presenting ClearlyDefined

I had the privilege of presenting ClearlyDefined together with E. Lynette Rayle from GitHub and we got some really good feedback and questions from the audience.

With the move towards SBOMs everywhere for compliance and security reasons, organizations will face great challenges to generate these at scale for each stage on the supply chain, for every build or release. Additionally, multiple organizations will have to curate the same missing or wrongly identified licensing metadata over and over again.

ClearlyDefined is well suited to solve these problems by serving a cached copy of licensing metadata for each component through a simple API. Organizations will also be able to contribute back with any missing or wrongly identified licensing metadata, helping to create a database that is accurate for the benefit of all.

GitHub is well aware of these challenges and is interested in helping its users in this regard. They recently added 17.5 million package licenses sourced from ClearlyDefined to their database, expanding the license coverage for packages that appear in dependency graph, dependency insights, dependency review, and a repository’s software bill of materials (SBOM).

To make use of ClearlyDefined’s data, a user can simply make a call to its API service. For example, to fetch licensing metadata from the lodash library on npm at version 4.17.21, one would call:

curl -X GET „https://api.clearlydefined.io/definitions/npm/npmjs/-/lodash/4.17.21” -H „accept: */*”

This API call would be processed by the service for ClearlyDefined, as illustrated in the diagram below. If there’s a match in the definition store, then that definition would be sent back to the user. Otherwise, this request would trigger the crawler for ClearlyDefined (part of the harvesting process), which would download the lodash library from npm, scan the library, and write the results to the raw results store. The service for ClearlyDefined would then read the raw results, summarize it, and create a definition to be written in the definition store. Finally, the definition would be served to the user.

The curation process is done through another API call via PATCHes. For example, the below PATCH updates a declared license to Apache-2.0:

„contributionInfo”: {      „summary”: „[Test] Update declared license”,      „details”: „The declared license should be Apache as per the LICENSE file.”,      „resolution”: „Updated declared license to Apache-2.0.”,      „type”:”incorrect”,      „removeDefinitions”:false  },

This curation is handled by the service for ClearlyDefined, as illustrated in the diagram below. The curation would trigger the creation of a PR in ClearlyDefined’s curated-data repository, which would be reviewed by and signed off by two curators. The PR would then be merged and written in the curated-data store.

GitHub has deployed its own local Harvester for ClearlyDefined, as illustrated in the diagram below. GitHub’s OSPO Policy Service posts requests to GitHub’s Harvester for ClearlyDefined, which downloads any components and dependencies from various package managers, scans these components, and writes the results directly to ClearlyDefined’s raw results store. GitHub’s OSPO Policy Service fetches definitions from the service for ClearlyDefined as well as licenses and attributions from GitHub’s Package License Gateway. GitHub maintains a local cache store which is synced with any updates from ClearlyDefined’s changes-notifications blob storage.

ClearlyDefined’s development has seen an increased participation from various organizations this past year, including GitHub, SAP, Microsoft, Bloomberg, and CodeThink.

Currently, maintainers of ClearlyDefined are focused on ongoing maintenance. Key goals for ClearlyDefined in 2024 include:

Publishing periodic releases and switching to semantic versioning

Bringing dependencies up to date (in particular using the latest scancode)

Improving the NOASSERTION/OTHER issue

Advancing usability and the curation process through the UI 

Enhancing the documentation and process for creating a local harvest

Our slides are available here.

Relevant breakout sessions

ORT Community Days provided several breakout sessions to allow participants to discuss pain points and solutions.

A special discussion around curations was led by Sebastian Schuberth and E. Lynette Rayle. The ORT Package Curation Data can be broken down into two categories: metadata interpretations and legal curations. The group discussed their thoughts about the curation process and its challenges, including handling false positives and the sharing of curations.

Nowadays, no conference would be complete without at least one talk or discussion about Artificial Intelligence. A group gathered to discuss the potential use of AI to improve user experience as well as for OSS compliance. The majority of attendees believed ORT’s documentation could be improved through the use of AI and even an assistant would be helpful to answer the most common questions. As for the use of AI for OSS compliance, there’s a lot of potential here, and one idea would be to use ClearlyDefined’s curation dataset to fine tune a LLM.


The second edition of ORT Community Days represented a unique opportunity for the ClearlyDefined community to better engage with the ORT community. We were able to meet the maintainers and members of ORT and learn from them about the current and future challenges. We were also able to explore how our communities can further collaborate. 

On behalf of the ClearlyDefined community, I would like to thank the organizers of this wonderful event: Marcel Kurzmann, Nikola Babadzhanov, Surya Santhi, and Thomas Steenbergen. I would also like to thank E. Lynette Rayle, Lukas Spieß and Qing Tomlinson from the ClearlyDefined community who have accepted my invitation to participate in this conference.

If you are interested in Open Source supply chain compliance and security, I invite you to learn a bit more about the ClearlyDefined and the ORT communities. You might also be interested in my report from FOSS Backstage.

Source: opensource.org

Three perspectives from FOSS Backstage

As a community manager, I find FOSS Backstage to be one of my favorite conferences content-wise and community-wise. This is a conference that happens every year in Berlin, usually in early March. It’s a great opportunity to meet community leaders from Europe and across the world with the goal of fostering discussions around three complementary perspectives: a) community health and growth, b) project governance and sustainability, and c) supply chain compliance and security.

Community health and growth

While there were several interesting talks, one of the highlights of the “Community health and growth” track was Tom “spot” Callaway’s talk embracing your weird: community building through fun & play. Tom shared some really interesting ideas to help members bond together: a badge program, a candy swap activity, a coin giveaway, a scavenger hunt, and a karaoke session.

FOSS Backstage this year was special because I got to finally meet 3 members from the ClearlyDefined community who have given a new life to this project: E. Lynette Rayle and Lukas Spieß from GitHub and Qing Tomlinson from SAP. While we did not go into a scavenger hunt or a karaoke session (that would have been fun), we spent most of our time during the week having lunch and dinner together, watching talk sessions together, networking with old and new acquaintances, and even going for some sightseeing in Berlin. This has allowed us to not only share ideas about the future of ClearlyDefined, but most importantly to have fun together and create a strong bond between us.

Please find below a list of interesting talks from this track:

Dr. Wolfgang Gehring: a journey to inner source

Tom “spot” Callaway: embracing your weird: community building through fun & play

Kyle J. Davis: how you write matters in Open Source

Bertrand Delacretaz: distributed teams that actually work!

Carmen Delgado: how contribution programs benefit mentors and participants

Celeste Horgan: more than developers: growing your maintainer community

Brian Proffitt: measuring the impact of community events

Divya Mohan: navigating the gold rush: of influencer economies and FOSS

Zainab Daodu, Omotola Enice Omotayo: docs for all: improving Open Source accessibility

Mayank Jindal: Open Source inclusivity: empowering newcomers

Project governance and sustainability

In last year’s FOSS Backstage, I had the opportunity to meet Thomas Steenbergen for the first time. He’s the co-founder of ClearlyDefined and the OSS Review Toolkit (ORT) communities. Project governance and sustainability is something Thomas deeply cares about, and I was honored to be invited to give  a talk together with him for this year’s conference.

Our talk was about aligning wishes of multiple organizations into an Open Source project. This is a challenge that many projects face: oftentimes they struggle to align wishes and get commitment from multiple organizations towards a shared roadmap. There’s also the challenge of the “free rider” problem, where the overuse of a common resource without giving back often leads to the tragedy of the commons. Thomas shared the idea of a collaboration marketplace and a contributor commitment agreement where organizations come together to identify, commit, and implement a common enhancement proposal. This is a strategy that we are applying to ORT and ClearlyDefined.

Our slides are available here.

Please find below a list of interesting talks from this track:

Dawn Foster: a strategic approach to assessing viability of OSS projects

Ruth Cheesley: changing the governance model of an established project

Rich Bowen: talking with management about Open Source

Schlomo Schapiro, Gratien Dhaese: why is there no new release? Nobody pays for the basics

Giacomo Tenaglia: CERN’s Open Source Program Office

Per Ploug Krogslund: has Open Source outgrown the OSPO?

Tarus Balog: adventures with Open Source business models

Dirk Gernhardt, Klaus Mueller: Open Source excellence: Munich’s journey towards public code

Paloma Oliveira, Fiona Krakenbuger, Lina Bocker, Thomas Steenbergen: freedom vs sustainable business: a candid necessary debate

Shane Curcuru: who funds FOSS foundations?

Dawn Wages: success through a thousand emails: fundraising and outreach

Peer Heinlein, Daniel Zielke: the cuckoo in bidding: when manufacturer loses to itself

Nick Vidal, Thomas Steenbergen: aligning wishes of multiple orgs into an Open Source project

Supply chain compliance and security

Under the “supply chain compliance and security” track, I was happy to watch a wonderful talk from my friend Ana Jimenez Santamaria entitled looking at Open Source security from a community angle. She has been leading the TODO Group at the Linux Foundation for quite a few years now, and it was interesting to learn how they are helping OSPOs (Open Source Program Offices) to create a trusted software supply chain. Ana highlighted three takeaways:

OSPOs integrate Open Source in an organization’s IT infrastructure.

Collaboration between employees, Open Source staff, and security teams with the Open Source ecosystem offers a complete security coverage across the whole supply chain.

OSPOs have the important mission of achieving digitalization, innovation and security in a healthy and continuous way.

Please find below a list of interesting talks from this track:

Melanie Rieback: when business models are conflicting with security

Ana Jimenez Santamaria: looking at Open Source security from a community angle

Mirko Boehm: EU cybersecurity regulation and Open Source governance

Fukami: FOSS and security risk management

Lina Bocker, Angelika Wittek: Open Source contributions in today’s world

Petteri Kivimaki: automating Open Source license compliance

Bonus: Open Source AI

Nowadays, no conference would be complete without at least one talk about Artificial Intelligence, so Frank Karlitschek’s keynote what the AI revolution means for Open Source and our society was very welcome! Frank demonstrated that Open Source AI can indeed compete with proprietary solutions from the big players. He presented Nextcloud Assistant that runs locally, and that can be studied and modified. This assistant offers several exciting features: face recognition in photos, text translation, text summarization, text generation, image generation, speech transcript, and document classification –  all this while preserving privacy.

It’s worth pointing out that the Open Source Initiative is driving a multi-stakeholder process to define an “Open Source AI” and everyone is welcome to be part of the conversation.


I had a wonderful time at FOSS Backstage and I invite everyone interested in community, governance, and supply chain to join this amazing event next year. I would like to thank the organizers who work “backstage” to put together this conference. Thank you Paul Berschick, Sven Spiller, Alexander Brateanu, Isabel Drost-Fromm, Anne Sophie Riege, and Stefan Rudnitzki. A special thanks also to the volunteers, speakers, sponsors, and last but not least to all attendees who made this event special.

If you are interested in Open Source supply chain compliance and security, I invite you to learn a bit more about the ClearlyDefined and the ORT communities. Be sure to check out my report from the ORT Community Days.

Source: opensource.org

Open Source AI Definition – weekly update Mar 11

Big week, marked by the release of draft 0.0.6! The document is available for live comments and more general comments on the forum.

Changes in the section “What is open source AI”

added, “Precondition to exercise these freedoms is to have access to the preferred form to make modifications to the system.” With an example of what this looks like for a machine learning system

checklist to evaluate legal documents: the component details are presented. They reflect the results of the working groups

Change in wording from “license” to “legal document”

The preamble is left untouched, more discussion seems to be needed.

We held our fifth town hall meeting this previous Friday, the 8th of March.

Click here to access the recording

Why were these 4 systems picked and not others? Will more AI systems be analyzed?

(Participant question) out of 4 working groups, 2 refer to models under proprietary licenses. Of the 4 groups, 3 refer to LLMs. The Groups do not reflect what will (likely) be in the definition, therefore, it is a waste of time for OSI to consider them when crafting a definition.

(OSI response) It is important to have a diversified analysis, as at this stage, we are considering how the models operate rather than their license. The objective of the working groups was to identify the required components to exercise the 4 freedoms, and we found them to be quite similar. 

Next steps: Analyze a combination of each of the systems, which systems have these components, and find and review their accompanying legal documents. Follow this thread on the forum if you want to help.

How will the Open Source AI Definition and the “classic” OSD interact?

An interesting question was raised for which there should be an answer once the Open Source AI Definition gets closer to being feature complete.

Source: opensource.org

VMware Skyline Advisor Pro Proactive Findings – January 2024 Edition

Tweet VMware Skyline Advisor Pro releases new proactive Findings every month. Findings are prioritized by trending issues in VMware Technical Support, issues raised through post escalation review, security vulnerabilities, issues raised from VMware engineering, and nominated by customers. For the month of January, we released 60 new Findings. Of these, there are 37 Findings based … Continued

The post VMware Skyline Advisor Pro Proactive Findings – January 2024 Edition appeared first on VMware Support Insider.

Source: vmware

Skyline Advisor Pro: Introducing Inventory Export Reports

Tweet You’ve asked for the ability to export inventory information, including licensing, and we’ve listened. The Skyline Team is proud to introduce this highly requested feature, Inventory Export Reports. Inventory Export Reports allow you to generate reports on your inventory, licensing, and configuration data. These reports can help you to identify potential problems, track changes … Continued

The post Skyline Advisor Pro: Introducing Inventory Export Reports appeared first on VMware Support Insider.

Source: vmware

Alphabet CEO celebrates Google turning 25 years old

Alphabet CEO Sundar Pichai has sent a letter to Google’s employees to celebrate the company’s 25th birthday and lay out visions for the future. Sergey Brin and Larry Page founded Google on September 4, 1998. The company is now far beyond a simple Internet search engine and offers a wide range of products and online services.
The letter starts with a gratitude to Google users, employees, and partners. Then, Pichai goes on to say how Brin and Page started Google with a simple idea and how the company is now a platform to answer all kinds of questions, including healthcare, pursuing new career paths, starting new businesses, etc.
Despite Google’s expansion to other business areas like hardware with Pixel devices, the CEO says the search is still at the core of their mission, and it’s their “biggest moonshot” with so much more that needs to be done. Pichai added that Google now has 15 products serving more than half a billion people and businesses and six others serving more than 2 billion users each.
Google’s past, present, and future with CEO Sundar Pichai
Pichai then mentions Google’s challenges in the 2000s about how long can the web really last or in 2010 when users questioned Google’s ability to adapt to the era of mobile computing. “Each time, we’ve answered by coming back even stronger. We’ve done this guided by a singular focus on our mission, our belief in applying deep computer science to make people’s lives better, and a healthy disregard for the impossible.” He noted.
Alphabet’s CEO discusses AI and how it can change Google. He stated Google has been an early investor in AI and was the first company to incorporate machine learning into its products in the early 2000s.
According to Pichai, AI is the “biggest technological shift” we see in our lifetime and probably bigger than the Internet itself. “It’s a fundamental rewiring of technology and an incredible accelerant of human ingenuity.” Pichai added. He later says Google’s mission for the next ten years and beyond is to make AI helpful to everyone and deploy it responsibly.The post Alphabet CEO celebrates Google turning 25 years old appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Samsung Galaxy S23 series gets Sep. 2023 update in the US

After pushing a massive camera update in August, Samsung is now rolling out the September 2023 security update to the Galaxy S23 series. The latest security patch is currently available for carrier-locked units in the US. More specifically, it’s rolling out for Verizon users. Samsung should expand the release to other carrier variants and unlocked units in the coming days, while simultaneously bringing the update to international markets.
The September update for the Galaxy S23, Galaxy S23+, and Galaxy S23 Ultra on Verizon’s network comes with the firmware build number S918USQS1AWHD. As suggested by the build number and confirmed by the carrier through its official release notes (via), the latest Samsung flagships aren’t getting anything more than this month’s security patch. “The current software update provides the most up to date Android security patches on your device” Verizon’s changelog states.
It shouldn’t be long before Samsung’s September SMR (Security Maintenance Release) is available for the Galaxy S23 trio more widely. The Korean firm revealed yesterday that the latest security patch contains more than 60 vulnerability fixes. More precisely, Galaxy devices are getting 23 Android OS patches from Google, 35 Samsung patches, and 4 Samsung semiconductor patches. At least four of these vulnerabilities were critical ones, Google confirmed.
Samsung has already pushed these security fixes to the Galaxy S22 series and Galaxy A14 5G in some markets. The Galaxy S23 series has now joined the party. If you’re using any of these Galaxy phones, you should get the September SMR in the coming days if you haven’t already. Watch out for a notification promoting you to download the update over the air (OTA). You can also manually check for new OTA updates from the Software update menu in the Settings app.
The Galaxy S23 series may get the Android 14 update in October
The Galaxy S23 series may not be getting any notable goodies with the September update, but a major new update is just around the corner for the latest Samsung flagships. The Korean firm is readying Android 14 for the phones. The big Android update will come along with its One UI 6.0 custom software.
Samsung has already released a couple of Android 14-based One UI 6.0 beta builds for the Galaxy S23 trio. If history is any indication, the stable update should arrive by the end of October. However, Google delaying the public release of Android 14 may push back Samsung’s plans as well. We will keep track of these developments and let you know when we have more information.The post Samsung Galaxy S23 series gets Sep. 2023 update in the US appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

MediaTek announces the world's first 3nm smartphone chipset

MediaTek today announced that it has successfully developed a 3nm smartphone processor. The Taiwanese chipmaker became the world’s first semiconductor company to formally announce a 3nm chipset for smartphones. Samsung and Qualcomm are using 4nm process nodes for their next-gen flagship chipsets. Apple’s upcoming Bionic A17 SoC for the iPhone 15 series will be a 3nm solution, but it’s not yet official.
MediaTek’s first 3nm processor will be manufactured using TSMC’s industry-leading 3nm chip fabrication technology. However, the company hasn’t shared many details about the chip, not even its name. It has only said that the chipset will be a flagship offering under its Dimensity lineup. It will enter mass production next year. Devices powered by the chip will arrive on the market in the second half of 2024.
According to MediaTek, its first 3nm solution won’t be limited to smartphones and tablets. The Taiwanese chip giant also expects the chip to power “intelligent cars and various other devices.” It says the processor is equipped with technologies necessary to meet the “ever-increasing user experience requirements” for mobile computing, high-speed connectivity, artificial intelligence (AI), and multimedia.
“We are committed to our vision of using the world’s most advanced technology to create cutting-edge products that improve our lives in meaningful ways,” said MediaTek President Joe Chen. “TSMC’s consistent and high-quality manufacturing capabilities enable MediaTek to fully demonstrate its superior design in flagship chipsets, offering the highest performance and quality solutions to our global customers and enhancing the user experience in the flagship market.”
MediaTek will benefit from TSMC’s more efficient 3nm process
TSMC’s 3nm process technology brings power, performance, and logic density improvements over older generations. Compared to its 5nm solutions, 3nm chips will deliver 18 percent after performance at the same power. Keeping the speed unchanged will result in a 32 percent power reduction. 3nm chips also bring a 60% increase in logic density, freeing up some space inside devices. Mediatek will benefit from these improvements.
As said earlier, the Taiwanese firm will beat both Samsung and Qualcomm to the 3nm race. The latter two companies are sticking to the 4nm tech for at least one more year. Their 3nm smartphone chips won’t be available until early 2025. So MediaTek will have a few months of headstart over its two arch-rivals in the semiconductor industry. Time will tell whether this helps it make further inroads into the premium phone segment, which is largely dominated by Qualcomm.The post MediaTek announces the world’s first 3nm smartphone chipset appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Google Calendar is testing a way to clear the clutter

Most Android users turn to Google Calendar to manage their lives. Its integration with Google Tasks is tight, and that makes using both of these services seamless. According to Android Police, Google Calendar will automatically hide completed tasks.
If you use Google Tasks and Calendar, then you know the struggle of seeing a cluttered Calendar interface. The completed remain in your Calendar interface, and they can clutter the whole app. If left unattended, this could really make for a messy interface.
Thankfully, Google Calendar will automatically hide completed tasks
At the moment, this seems to still be rolling out, as not everyone is seeing it right now. As you can imagine, when you mark a task as complete in Google Tasks, that task will automatically be hidden in Google Calendar.
This is a great way to clear up the interface if you have a bunch of tasks. If you want to show the tasks again, it’s a simple task to bring them back. If you have the feature, you’ll see the toggle in the general settings. You’ll see the toggle right under the Show week number toggle. At the moment, it seems that this could be a server-side update, so you’ll probably have to wait a bit for it to make it to your device.
In other Google Calendar news
Google Calendar now shows Microsoft Outlook attendees when in a meeting. Microsoft Outlook users are able to invite Google Calendar users to meetings. However, previously, the Outlook user’s name would not be visible to the Google Calendar user.
However, Google eventually changed. So, if you get a meeting invite from a Microsoft Outlook user, you’ll be able to see the user’s name. This is great because you’d want to know who’s inviting you to the meeting. If this is a business meeting, this is information you should have.The post Google Calendar is testing a way to clear the clutter appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

The Approved Open Source Licenses never looked better

A license-review project has been underway with the goal of creating a systematic and well-ordered database of all the licenses that have been submitted to OSI for approval since the time of the organization’s founding. Giulia Dellanoce was brought on as an intern to complete this Approval Registry project, and we’re very thankful for her work in completing this mission.

The OSI Approved Licenses database is now available on the OSI website!

The Open Source community needs a resource to confidently and easily identify licenses that have gained OSI approval, and now they have it. This Approval Registry offers a comprehensive and authoritative listing of all licenses so organizations know that the license they choose for their project allows their software to be freely used, modified, shared and monetized in compliance with the Open Source Definition.

The building of the Approval Registry required the review of decades worth of material, including:

Review of the public license review mailing lists from 2008 – 2023

Review of the license discuss mailing lists from 1999 – 2007

Review of the public board meeting minutes 2005 – 2023 

The license pages have been updated to include the status of each license, whether it has been approved, withdrawn, voluntarily retired or rejected by the board. The metadata of each license has also been updated with links to relevant documentation. 

More valuable licensing information to come

There are plans for future expansion of this project, as the work is never done. Greater details about licenses will continue to be added. As licenses move through the process of being considered for OSI approval, a current status will be listed in the database. Also, OSI has assembled a listing of non-approved licenses for easy searching that will be located on the website at a future date. 

Another future expansion is the development of an API service that can answer questions like “is this license approved?” There is already a community-contributed API service but it’s not carefully maintained to match the actual list. If you have uses for consuming the database of Approved Licenses via API please get in touch.

If you think we’ve missed something, a license page looks wrong or you have access to email board archives from the past, please let us know. File a ticket or contact us.

Thank you to Giulia for this important work, and to Slim.AI for the donation to OSI that supported this project so they and other companies can have a trustable, centralized list of Open Source Approved License®.
The post <span class=’p-name’>The Approved Open Source Licenses never looked better</span> appeared first on Voices of Open Source.

Source: opensource.org

Praise Lathander, Baldur's Gate 3 is getting cross-play

Baldur’s Gate 3 has a lot going for it but it’s missing one feature that players are undoubtedly wanting and that’s cross-play. Because gaming with friends tends to be a lot of fun. Luckily, it seems Larian’s latest masterpiece of a video game is indeed going to have cross-play. Eventually.
Technically the game launched years ago for PC in an early-access state and was available via Steam. It’s “official” launch was last month on August on 3 for PC players. And as of today, September 6, PS5 players can finally dive in. The unfortunate thing is that cross-play between PC and console is not currently a thing in Baldur’s Gate 3. Even though the game is not primarily intended to be a multiplayer experience, co-op gameplay is available. And soon you won’t be required to play on the same platform as your friends.
In a report with Eurogamer recently, director of publishing at Larian Studios Michael Douse confirmed that cross-play was on the development roadmap. And that integrating it was always planned. It just wasn’t possible to have done for the official launch of the game. Douse says it was “one thing too many to have ready for launch.”
Baldur’s Gate 3 cross-play support doesn’t currently have a release date
The good news, is that cross-play has now been confirmed. Which means at some point, PC players and PS5 players (and Xbox Series X players when the game comes out) will be able to wander the forgotten realms together. Having said that, there’s no current timeframe for release. At least not one Larian is willing to mention publicly.
Douse says that the feature is in planning and on the roadmap. There’s even an internal idea of when they would like the feature to be ready. However, Larian doesn’t want to give a specific date breath because it wants to be absolutely sure cross-play is in working order for players. Basically, it’ll be ready when it’s ready. And that’s just fine. Because the last thing cross-play needs is to stumble due to bugs.
Players have already waited several years for Baldur’s Gate 3. And all that extra time in development has made the game all the better. What’s a little more time waiting for Larian to ensure cross-play can be rolled out without problems?The post Praise Lathander, Baldur’s Gate 3 is getting cross-play appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

5 reasons why you should buy the Garmin Venu 3

Last week Garmin launched its latest sports watch that you can buy, the Venu 3. It retails for $449.99 and supports both Android and iOS. Being this is the third-generation of the watch in Garmin’s Venu series, it’s Garmin’s most refined model yet. With tons of improvements and new features. Making it a well-rounded sports watch for those who already live or want to live a more active lifestyle.
Now you might be asking, “why should I buy the Garmin Venu 3?” And that’s a valid question. I mean, there are plenty of smartwatches and sports watches out there. What makes Garmin’s latest a better option or what makes it worth my hard-earned money. At the end of the day, only you can decide if the watch is right for you, but we can tell you why you should at the very least consider the Garmin Venu 3 as your next watch.
With that said, let’s go over some reasons that we think are excellent representations of why this is a watch you definitely want.
Garmin Venu 3 – Best Buy
You should buy the Garmin Venu 3 because it has better battery life than most smartwatches
The biggest reason you should buy the Garmin Venu 3 is battery life. Most smartwatches, including the Apple Watch, and just about every single Wear OS watch, all have at best, passable battery life. Some, like the Galaxy Watch 5 Pro do last longer and are good for a Wear OS watch. But not necessarily good compared to all smartwatches and sports watches.
With the watches that come from Garmin, it’s rare you won’t find one that lasts for several days in smartwatch mode. The Venu 3 is no different here. It can last for up to 14 days on a single charge. Two whole weeks. In smartwatch mode with access to all or most of the best features the watch has to offer. Like connected apps, smartphone notifications, activity and sleep tracking and much, much more.
You can pull this thing off the charger and not have to worry about the battery for quite a few days. That is unless you’re using things like GPS for extended periods of time. Then you’ll want to at the very least check the battery by the end of the day. But when you aren’t using those features with more heavy battery drain, and that’s likely to be the case most of the time, don’t expect the battery to die until much later. No one needs one more thing to worry about having to charge every or every other night. The Venu 3 gives you peace of mind in that regard.
The wheelchair mode makes this a more inclusive smartwatch

This is a really neat feature that you won’t see everywhere. If honestly, anywhere else at all. For those who happen to be in a wheelchair but are still quite active, the Venu 3 offers a wheelchair mode. Maybe you weren’t aware this was a thing and if not, we’re happy to bring it to your attention.
The wheelchair mode works to track pushes instead of steps. It also supports tracking handcycle movements and gives wheelchair users an animated representation of wheelchair-specific workouts. If you’re in a wheelchair and want a sports watch that is more tailored to you, the Garmin Venu 3 is that watch.
Safety and tracking features if you need help
Hopefully the safety and tracking features are ones you’ll never have to use. But it is nice that they’re there just in case. Because it’s better to be prepared. As they say, it’s better to have and not need, then to need and not have.
With the safety and tracking features on Garmin’s Venu 3 watch, should you need help in a particularly dangerous situation, the watch can alert your emergency contacts. Now you do have to set this feature up. That means adding emergency contacts to the watch through the companion app. The watch also needs to be paired to a smartphone so in the event of needing to alert an emergency contact, it can.
Once set up, emergency contacts will be alerted through message or voice call during certain events, such as incident detection, and be given your location. Your phone does need to have network coverage for this to work. But it could be a lifesaving feature and that’s even more peace of mind.
The nap tracking is a next-level feature

It’s simple. And yet, one of the best features we’ve seen on a watch in a while. Naps are not to be taken for granted. Because a good nap can be just what you need to recharge your body and your mind. With the Garmin Venu 3, you can set up the watch to automatically track naps. The watch can use this feature to log your nap length and that information gets used for even more insightful features. For instance, the watch will tell you how the length of your naps is impacting things like the Body Battery feature. Or how it impacts your energy monitoring.
Since you probably aren’t planning your naps out, the automatic nap tracking ends up being pretty useful. And it’s a great companion feature to the sleep tracking which provides even more insights to how your rests are impacting everything from your workouts to your daily routine.
Coaching by Garmin to help you prepare for your next big race
Another good reason to buy the Garmin Venu 3 is the Garmin Coach. Some people thrive off having a coach to help them through training. And the Garmin Coach can certainly be that if needed.
With this feature, you get assisted coaching in preparing you for your next big 5K, 10K, or half marathon. You can set goals for yourself and then train with one of three Garmin Coaches and get a new dynamic training plan that changes based on the performance of your last training sessions. So the training plans move with you.
There’s also the animated workouts to help you ensure you’re doing everything the way you’re supposed to and motivate you get through your toughest workouts. The animated workouts support cardio training, Pilates, HIIT and yoga, and even strength training.
Garmin Venu 3 – Best BuyThe post 5 reasons why you should buy the Garmin Venu 3 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Microsoft Teams will let you revist old meeting, but at a cost

If you use Microsoft Office for work, then you most definitely use Microsoft Teams to conduct your meetings. Meetings are often full to the brim with useful information, and retrieving that information can be a pain. Well, Microsoft Teams will let you revisit and record your old meetings. However, this does come at a cost.
Speaking of Microsoft Teams, Microsoft has unbundled Teams from Office in Europe, which is unfortunate. Before you get your pitchforks out, this wasn’t entirely Microsoft’s decision.
Not too long ago, Slack CEO Eric Yuan asked the EU to look into Microsoft about it bundling Teams with Office as a possible antitrust violation. This prompted the company to unbundle the services in Europe. Yuan has since asked the United States FTC to investigate as well.
You can revisit your old Teams meetings but at a cost
If you need to recall something from a meeting that you didn’t write down or go over what was said, Microsoft now gives you the ability to do so. According to Techradar, Microsoft released an API that will allow you to pull transcripts from past meetings.
This will cost the user .24¢ per minute. So, if you pull a full hour, then it will cost you about 14¢. That’s not much if you’re just going back through a few meetings, but if your meetings go long, or if you need to sift through a ton of meetings, then the costs will add up.
What if you want to pull actual recordings? Well, you can do this as well. This will cost a bit more money at 3¢ per minute. So, pulling a full hour would cost you $1.80. Again, in the grand scheme of things, that’s not a lot. However, the costs could rack up if you need to pull a bunch of recordings.
If you use Microsoft Teams in the US, keep an eye out for any new changes coming down the road. If the FTC looks into Microsoft as per Slack’s request, then Teams might be unbundled from Office.The post Microsoft Teams will let you revist old meeting, but at a cost appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Liven up your movies with this 65-inch TCL 4K TV for $420 off

These days getting a 4K smart TV like this one on sale from TCL isn’t as expensive as it used to be, and with this one being $420 off right now it’s a pretty great deal.
With a large, 65-inch screen you’ll be able to amplify your movie and TV viewing experiences to new heights. And playing games on a large screen like this one is truly something else. Right now at Best Buy you can snag the TCL 65-inch Class 6-Series 4K smart TV for $579.99. It’s normally $999.99.
The display uses a Mini-LED QLED panel for exceptional contrast, brightness, and vivid colors. Basically, there’s a good chance your movies, TV shows, and games have never looked this good. There’s lots of really great features baked in here too. For starters it’s a smart TV with Chromecast built-in. That gives you access to lots of apps and streaming services like Netflix, Max, Hulu, Prime Video and tons more. You also get access to things like GeForce NOW and the Xbox app if you like playing games in the cloud.
If you play games directly from a console, like the PS5 or Xbox Series X, this has Variable Refresh Rate so your games are always smooth. It also has auto game mode so the TV knows when you power on a console. Leaving you free to jump right into whatever you’re wanting to play and not have to mess around with the TV settings to change modes. Worth noting is that this is a clearance price. So this deal isn’t likely to last for very long. If you want to snag this TV for nearly half off, you can do so at the link below.
TCL 65-inch 4K Mini-LED QLED Smart TV – Best BuyThe post Liven up your movies with this 65-inch TCL 4K TV for $420 off appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Top 10 VMware Tanzu KB Articles for Dev Apps in August, 2023 

Tweet In this blog post we’ve compiled a list of frequently encountered errors and their solutions to help you get back on track! Here are the most popular knowledge base articles for Developer and Application Platform in August.    Learn how to collect BOSH Director logs to troubleshoot BOSH Tasks’ internal workflow. When BOSH Tasks fail … Continued

The post Top 10 VMware Tanzu KB Articles for Dev Apps in August, 2023  appeared first on VMware Support Insider.

Source: vmware

Spotify will make sharing music a bit more mysterious

If you come across a song on Spotify that just makes your day, you’re more than likely going to share it with someone. Sharing on the platform is straightforward as it is, but the company wants to make this feature a bit more mysterious. Spotify is testing a feature that will make sharing music a surprise.
Spotify is testing a surprise music feature
When you share a song on Spotify, the recipient knows just what they’re getting themselves into. They’ll see the song you sent along with the album art and other information. It’s a pretty basic function, but the company is looking to spice things up a little.
As spotted by @SaadhJawwadh on Twitter, Spotify is working on a new feature that will let you share music as a surprise. With the feature, you’ll see a new option when you summon the share sheet.
You’ll see a screen with the text “Share it as an audio surprise”. Under that, you’ll see a present icon. When the recipient gets the song, they won’t see the album or any information. They’ll need to tap on it to see what the song is.
This doesn’t only apply when you’re sharing music with other people. You’ll see the present icon when you share music among other apps. In the screenshots, we see that it also applies when you’re sharing this as an Instagram Story. In the Story, users will tap on the Play on Spotify button to play the song.
This is a nice way for people to have a little more fun when sharing music. Users can also make a game out of it if they typically share music with other people. At the moment, we don’t know when Spotify plans on releasing this new feature to the public. Since @SaadhJawwadh was able to get it working, then it might not be that far away from a release. The post Spotify will make sharing music a bit more mysterious appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Logitech's new Pro X gaming keyboard ditches cables for $199

Logitech is back with an improved pro gaming keyboard in the G Pro X TKL Lightspeed. Ditching the cables in favor of its highly praised Lightspeed wireless technology, the new gaming keyboard is mostly everything that was loved about the first, except with wireless connectivity and a few other enhancements for the higher $199.99 price tag (the wired model is $149.99).
It loses the ability for hot-swappable switches. But Logitech does offer three switch options with this new board – the Linear GX Red switches, Tactile GX Brown switches, and Clicky GX Blue switches. For the wireless connectivity, you can set it up to connect to your PC using the included Lightspeed USB adapter or use Bluetooth. You may get more battery life with Bluetooth. So that might be preferred for everyday use. Then you can switch over to Lightspeed and its low-latency connection when it’s game time.
Either way Logitech says the keyboard can last for up to 50 hours. And that’s going to be plenty for most users out there.
Logitech designed the Pro X TKL Lightspeed in collaboration with pro players
As with its other Pro X devices, Logitech worked directly with pro players on this new keyboard. What that means for non-pro players is that you can rest assured you’re getting a good quality gaming keyboard. Because pro players use and actually like it.
Whether it’s the programmable keys or the basically unmatched Lightspeed wireless technology, this is a keyboard that can perform well. The Lightspeed wireless in particular is one of my personal favorite features. And it’s why Logitech’s G915 TKL has been on our Best Gaming Keyboards list for so long. Logitech just makes it so easy to swap between the Lightspeed connection and Bluetooth just by pressing the dedicated buttons. And this can be invaluable if you use the keyboard with more than one device.
Additionally, Logitech offers the new Pro X TKL Lightspeed in three different colors. Black, White, and the new Pink option. You’ll also find a media roller and other dedicated media keys lined up across the top. Just like on the G915 TKL and the G715. All-in-all the new keyboard is likely to be one of Logitech’s best to date. To top things all off, Logitech even packs it with a really high-quality and durable travel case.
Logitech G Pro X TKL LightspeedThe post Logitech’s new Pro X gaming keyboard ditches cables for $199 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Apple says iMessage isn't popular enough to as a "gatekeeper" service

The European Union has been one of the few governing bodies trying to control the monopoly of tech giants like Apple. As part of these efforts, it introduced a new law called the Digital Markets Act, which aims to address concerns about the monopolistic behavior of tech giants by singling out certain platforms as “gatekeepers,” including Apple’s iMessage service. However, with just days remaining before the gatekeeper designation, Apple is now reportedly challenging the decision, citing the popularity of iMessage in the EU.
Apple says that iMessage can’t be a gatekeeper service
The core objective of the DMA, which was first introduced in October 2020, is to restrict what the EU perceives as the excessive control exercised by major tech companies by labeling their services as gatekeepers. As per the act, for a platform to qualify as a “gatekeeper,” it should boast an annual turnover exceeding €7.5 billion, a market capitalization surpassing €75 billion, and a user base of over 45 million monthly active users within the EU. Consequently, if iMessage were to be categorized as a gatekeeper service, Apple would be required to open up iMessage to third-party operators.
However, Apple contends that iMessage falls short of this last criterion and does not meet the required 45 million monthly active users in the European region. As a result, the EU should not force it to open its doors to competing apps like WhatsApp.
While Apple’s latest decision could be an issue for the law’s enforcement, it also marks a significant shift from its stance in July, wherein the company, alongside Microsoft and other tech giants, issued a general statement acknowledging the applicability of the EU’s gatekeeper law without specifying services like iMessage.
Microsoft is also in the mix
Apple isn’t the only one who has recently shifted its stance, as Microsoft has also joined the company in contesting the inclusion of its search engine Bing in the “gatekeeper” list. Microsoft argues that the EU should not classify its search engine as it only has a market share of 3%.The post Apple says iMessage isn’t popular enough to as a „gatekeeper” service appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Windows 11 will stop pushing Edge on Eurpean users

If you use Windows, then you know how adamantly Microsoft is when trying to push you to using its Edge browser. This is understandable, as the company developed this browser. However, according to The Verge, Microsoft will stop pushing Edge on Windows 11 users in the EU.
While it’s understandable that Microsoft wants users to use its own browser, the company goes a little overboard with it. Even if you have a different browser assigned as the default, you’ll still find yourself navigating to Edge when you open certain links or do a search.
That’s a bit of an annoyance. When you assign a default browser like Chrome, Firefox, etc., you want it to be used for ALL of your browser needs, not most of them. This has been going on since Windows 10, and Windows 11 adopted this practice.
Windows 11 users in the EU won’t be pushed to using Edge
Folks in Europe who don’t like that Microsoft does this won’t need to worry for too much longer. Windows 11 users in the EU won’t be pushed to using the Edge browser. So, when they use the search feature and click on certain links, they’ll navigate to their default browser.
This was stated in the official changelog for the test build released last month. “In the European Economic Area (EEA), Windows system components use the default browser to open links,“.
This sounds like good news for people who don’t like what Microsoft is doing. The only thing is that it’s only happening in Europe. When The Verge reached out for comment, the company declined, so we’re left in the dark. There doesn’t seem to be a reason why Microsoft is doing this exclusively for the European market.
One reason could just be that the company is merely testing this feature for the European market before pushing it to the rest of the world. However, we’re not sure why Microsoft would decline to comment. We’ll just need to wait and see how this story develops.The post Windows 11 will stop pushing Edge on Eurpean users appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Nomad announces new Base One Max 3-in-1 & works with Apple Watch Ultra

Nomad has just unveiled a brand new wireless charger called the Base One Max 3-in-1. It is basically an upgrade to the Base One Max, but now adds a third coil that you can use to charge your earbuds like the AirPods Pro or AirPods.
Like the other wireless chargers from Nomad, this one does come in carbide and silver colors, and it’s also very heavy. Nomad likes to take their weighted bases to a whole new level with the Base One chargers. This is going to be a very heavy charger, which means that when you do pick up your phone, it won’t bring the base with it. That’s pretty important when talking about MagSafe, as those magnets can be very heavy.
The Base One Max is able to charge your iPhone at 15W wirelessly, as well as charging your Apple Watch and AirPods. Since Nomad is not touting speeds for the Apple Watch, this likely won’t use the faster charging that Apple added on the Series 7.
This time around, Apple Watch Ultra is actually compatible
The older Base One Max is a really great wireless charger. However, the Apple Watch Ultra isn’t really compatible. You need to stick something under the watch to get it to line up properly on that one. Which can be a real hassle. Nomad says that the Base One Max 3-in-1 was actually designed with the Apple Watch Ultra in mind. So this is a good thing here.
You can purchase the Nomad Goods Base One Max 3-in-1 from their website now. This is not a cheap wireless charger, in fact it’s one of the more expensive ones we’ve seen. Coming in at $170. But this is also one of the best made wireless chargers you can get right now. So it’s worth the extra cash.The post Nomad announces new Base One Max 3-in-1 & works with Apple Watch Ultra appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Diverse Open Source uses highlight need for precision in Cyber Resilience Act

As the European Cyber Resilience Act (CRA) is entering into the final legislative phase, it still has some needs arising from framing by the Commission or Parliament that result in breakage no matter how issues within its scope are “fixed”. 

Here’s a short list to help the co-legislators understand the engagement from the Open Source community.

OSI and the experts with whom they engage are not trying to get all of Open Source out of scope as maximalist lobbyists do for other aspects of technology. An exclusion from the regulation for Open Source software per se would open a significant loophole for openwashing. But the development of Open Source software in the open needs to be excluded from scope just as the development of software in private is. Our goal in engaging is just to prevent unintentional breakage while largely embracing the new regulation.

There is no one way to use Open Source. Many of the policymakers we’ve spoken to think of Open Source components in supply chains under the care of foundations like the Eclipse Foundation that are used essentially as-is. But the freedoms of Open Source are also used for stack building, consumer tools, enabling research, hobbyist tinkering, as the basis for European small businesses like XWiki, Open-Xchange, Abilian, and more. All these many other uses exist and are broken differently by the CRA. Software is primarily a cultural artifact and that aspect must be prioritized.

There is no single Open Source business model. People make money from Open Source (by charging for it, running it as a service and supporting it) and with Open Source (by simplifying their businesses and reducing costs); they shape markets via Open Source by enabling adjacent businesses, commoditising competitors without then monetising their customers, and more – there are a significant number of business models made possible by software freedom. So any attempt to identify commerciality is sure to be model-specific and consequently have unintended consequences for other models.

Even larger foundations like Linux Foundation do not actually employ the sort of staff who ensure code compliance – Open Source is conceptually disjoint from proprietary software. To comply with the CRA – if they find themselves in-scope – they will need them to hire a whole new operating unit. To them, the burden of compliance is not a cost of development funded by revenue as it would be for a manufactured physical good where staffing exists and just needs adapting.

OSI still recommends the Cyber Resilience Act should exclude all activities prior to commercial deployment of software and clearly ensure that responsibility for CE marks does not rest with any actor who is not a direct commercial beneficiary of deployment.
The post <span class=’p-name’>Diverse Open Source uses highlight need for precision in Cyber Resilience Act</span> appeared first on Voices of Open Source.

Source: opensource.org

Top 10 Kubernetes KBs! Insights from August 2023’s Top KBs for Tanzu Kubernetes.

VMware Tanzu, Knowledge Base, Linux troubleshooting, YARN, HDFS, Hive, configuration issues, query failures, step-by-step instructions, ping command failure, Hadoop

Join us as we take a tour through the most popular Kubernetes KBs of August 2023, revealing the critical insights and solutions that can help you navigate the complex landscape of Kubernetes troubleshooting.

The post Top 10 Kubernetes KBs! Insights from August 2023’s Top KBs for Tanzu Kubernetes. appeared first on VMware Support Insider.

Source: vmware

Switch to Visible today and cut your phone bill in half

Did you know that you could have Verizon’s award-winning network, with unlimited data and pay as little as $25 per month? Well, you can, thanks to Visible.  
Visible is a prepaid carrier owned by Verizon, and thus runs on the Verizon network. It’s an inexpensive way to be able to use Verizon’s 4G and 5G networks, and get the same great coverage and speeds. Visible’s plans start at just $25 per month for unlimited data. 
So what do you get for $25 per month on Visible? As it turns out, quite a bit. As mentioned, you do get unlimited talk, text and data. In addition to that, you get unlimited mobile hotspot, unlimited talk and text to Canada and Mexico, as well as Spam Protection. 
Visible offers a second more expensive plan, called Visible+. This plan is $45 per month, and offers access to Verizon’s Ultra Wideband (mmWave and C-Band) network. It does have unlimited data, however Visible notes that you might be throttled after you surpass 50GB of usage in a month. This plan offers everything that the base plan does, and it also includes unlimited talk, text and data roaming in Canada and Mexico, International Calling from the US to over 30 countries and International Texting from the US to over 200 countries. 
That sounds like a pretty sweet deal at $45 per month, right? Well, Visible is making it even sweeter. With our exclusive code, VISIBLE35 you can get the Visible+ plan for just $35 per month when you bring your own device.  As long as you stay an active member of Visible and do not change plans, you will continue to pay just $35 for the plan. This promotion for Visible+ expires on August 31, 2023. 

No hidden fees, what you see is what you pay
In the base rates that Visible shows on their website, that is what you’ll be paying. Taxes and fees are all included in that price. So if you switch to Visible, and sign up for the base Visible plan, that’s $25 per month, or the Visible+ plan, that’s only $35 per month. Nothing more, and nothing less. 
With Visible, there’s also no annual contract, you can leave Visible whenever you want, and bring your number with you. And this can all be done online. No more waiting in a carrier store to get help, Visible has fast and helpful customer service, which can be reached through online chat. 
Let’s not forget that you can also get the latest phones through Visible. There are tons of phones available to purchase directly through Visible that will work on their network. Including the latest from Samsung, Apple and Google, like the Galaxy S23 series, the iPhone 14 series and even the new Pixel Fold. You can finance these new devices, though Visible hands that off to Affirm which offers 24- or 36-month payment plans, depending on the price of the phone. 
You can bring your Apple Watch over to Visible as well, or buy a new one. Their wearable plan is $5 per month, allowing you to get phone and watch connectivity for as low as $30 per month. However, the wearable plan is currently limited to just the Apple Watch. 
Finally, if your current phone does not work on Visible’s network, they will replace it for free with a compatible device. This is called Visible Swap, and it makes it easier to switch to Visible without worrying about if you have to buy a new phone. Once your phone number ports over to Visible, they will overnight you the Swap phone. Which will also come with a prepaid return label so you can send in your old phone. And poof, you now have a phone that works on Visible. It really couldn’t get much easier. 
With Visible, you’re getting a lot of value, for not a lot of money. You can switch over to Visible by clicking here. It takes just a few minutes, as long as your phone is compatible and uses eSIM. If your phone is older and doesn’t support eSIM, don’t sweat it, Visible will overnight a physical SIM to you. So you’ll be up and running in no time. 
Switch to Visible The post Switch to Visible today and cut your phone bill in half appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Save big on the Anker Nano II 65W wall charger

Amazon has the new Anker Nano II 65W wall charger is on sale right now, dropping about 15% off of its regular price. And now it’s just $33.99. This is going to be a great pickup to go with the new smartphones coming out this Techtember and Techtober.
The Anker Nano II 65W charger has two USB-C ports and a USB-A port. The USB-C ports can do 65W each (but not simultaenously), with the USB-A port is doing 22.5W. Which is pretty impressive. Though, keep in mind that the more things you plug in here, the slower each port is going to charge. As this can only do 65W total, max. So if you use all three ports, the top USB-C port will do 40W still, while the second USB-C port and the USB-A port will do 12W each. For a max of 64W.
It’s a great charger to take on the go with you, since it is pretty small and the prongs are foldable. So you can toss it into your bag with ease. This wall charger uses GaN instead of silicon so it’s smaller than most other USB-C 65W chargers.
You can pick up this Anker charger from Amazon by clicking the link below.
Anker Nano II 65W – AmazonThe post Save big on the Anker Nano II 65W wall charger appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

You can't afford to miss this Dell XPS 13 Labor Day Deal

Dell is currently running a pretty awesome Labor Day deal on the XPS 13 laptop, knocking $200 off of its regular price, making it just $599. This deal is only good through Labor Day weekend, so you’d better be quick with this one.
This is a slightly older model of the Dell XPS 13, which has a 12th Gen Intel Core i5 processor, with 8GB of LPDDR5 RAM and 256GB of SSD storage. There’s also a 51Wh battery inside, that should get you through the day on a single charge. And if not, Dell also includes a 45W AC charger in the box – something your phone doesn’t come with.
Dell also includes two Thunderbolt 4 ports, and that’s it actually. There’s one on each side of the laptop. But Dell does include a USB-C to USB-A dongle, so you can use your older accessories with this laptop. The only downside with this laptop is that there’s no headphone jack at all. So you’ll need a dongle for that.
You can pick up the Dell XPS 13 Laptop from Dell’s website at the link below.
Dell XPS 13 – Dell.comThe post You can’t afford to miss this Dell XPS 13 Labor Day Deal appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Take a closer look at the eye-catching HONOR V Purse

HONOR showed off two devices at IFA 2023, the HONOR Magic V2 and the HONOR V Purse. The first one is the company’s latest book-style flagship, which was initially launched in China. The second, however, is a concept smartphone, that is rather interesting. We managed to get some hands-on time with the HONOR V Purse in Berlin. In this article, we’ll talk a bit about it.
We managed to get some hands-on time with the HONOR V Purse, kind of
Before we get down to it, do note that the software on the phone was not ready, so we did not get a chance to use it. The only thing that worked is one of the AOD styles that the company is using.
Now, the HONOR V Purse is a concept smartphone. This is a foldable phone that essentially turns into a purse. Initially, I thought that the purse strap attaches to the hinge directly, but it doesn’t, there’s a case that has to be attached to the hinge, basically. That’s something you’ll see in the images below.
HONOR presented quite a few styles of straps that can be used here. They range from the ones that contain pearls and feathers, to the ones with chains, and so on. The styles can be changed on the fly, with ease. This was a fashion-forward launch event, by the way, otherwise a product like this would be quite shocking.
This is an outwards-folding smartphone that resembles the Huawei Mate Xs 2
Now that we got that out of the way, the HONOR V Purse is an outwards-folding smartphone, much like the Huawei Mate Xs 2. It actually does resemble that phone to a degree. There is a button on the back that unlocks the phone, at which point you can unfold it.
When folded, part of its foldable display is exposed on the back, when unfolded, the entire display is on the front, of course. This is a completely different approach to book-style foldables.
It is worth noting that the HONOR V Purse is actually the thinnest foldable smartphone out there. It is even thinner than the Magic V2, which is not surprising, as it has only one display, unlike the Magic V2. The difference is not that big, though. Also, this phone is just a concept for now, so the Magic V2 is technically the thinnest foldable still.
It has two cameras on the back, and it sits nicely in the hand
The HONOR V Purse has two cameras on the back, and it sits nicely in the hand. As I said, we were not allowed to use it, and that includes unfolding it. I’d assume that the feeling is similar to what we got with the Huawei Mate Xs 2, which is not a bad thing at all. You can check out that review here.
You’ll find quite a few images of this phone in the gallery below. Now, if you’re wondering if it’s coming to market, that’s something we cannot answer, not yet. HONOR did refer to it as a concept smartphone, but considering how many different styles of straps they showed off, and the fact they mentioned they’d invite third-party designers to design AOD displays for this phone… chances are it’s coming.
Its specs & price tag are a mystery at the moment… presuming HONOR will release it at some point
We don’t know absolutely anything about its specifications, nor its price tag, though. That is something HONOR will share with us at a later date, presuming that this phone will hit the market at some point. For now, it’s just a showpiece that managed to grab attention at IFA 2023 in Berlin, and we gave it one of our IFA 2023 awards.
Event & booth pictures:

Hands-on pictures:

The post Take a closer look at the eye-catching HONOR V Purse appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

iPhone & Pixel enjoy a spa day in Google's new ad

Google’s #BestFriendsForever ads have been very popular. Ads in which iPhone and Pixel are best friends have been keeping people entertained for a while now, and a new ad just dropped. In this ad, the iPhone and Pixel are enjoying a spa day together, actually.
iPhone & Pixel enjoy a spa day in Google latest #BestFriendsForever ad
First and foremost, the setting itself is quite funny. Both phones have a cucumber over their “eyes”, or should we say “cameras”. People usually do have them over their eyes, so… there you go.
During the video, an iPhone complains to a Pixel that “these launches just keep getting harder”. Then it goes down memory lane, to the very first event, which occurred 16 years ago. Then he admits that he’s a little sad.
That’s the point where an iPhone said: “Now it seems like every time I turn around, phones like you are doing stuff I can’t. Like unblurring old photos, answering unknown calls with AI, and live translating messages. It’s exhausting but I still have a few tricks up my sleeve”.
Following that, Pixel is curious, and he asks the iPhone what tricks? At that point, an iPhone indirectly says it’ll get Type-C charging, trying to keep it a mystery, but the Pixel managed to guess it, which shocks the iPhone.
Google took this opportunity to promote its Pixel 8 launch event
After all that, a tagline appears, and says: “Rest up for October 4”, which is the Pixel 8 launch event, of course. As a reminder, the iPhone 15 event takes place on September 12. Google is also expected to announce the Pixel Watch 2 and the new Pixel Buds Pro colors during that event, in addition to the Pixel 8 series.
This ad is yet another fun way to highlight some features of the Pixel phones, features that iPhones do not have. At the same time, Google kind of poked Apple for taking so long to introduce Type-C charging.
The ad has a duration of around a minute. In case you’re interested, it’s embedded below.
The post iPhone & Pixel enjoy a spa day in Google’s new ad appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

TCL's stunning 65-inch QM8 Mini LED 4K TV crashes to its lowest price ever

Amazon has the TCL 65-inch QM8 Mini LED 4K TV on sale right now. Allowing you to save $300 off of its regular price, now just $999. This is the lowest price we’ve seen for the QM8 so far, and seeing as it’s only been on the market for a few months, this is a really good price.
This TV from TCL is a Mini LED TV, so what does that mean? Well, you’re getting a stunning picture quality here, and you’re also getting bright picture without killing the colors. Mini LED has a lot of the same advantages of OLED, but now it’s brighter. Speaking about the picture quality, this does also have Dolby Vision, making this one of the best looking TVs on the market.
The QM8 does run on Google TV, so you’re getting access to all of your favorite apps here. That includes YouTube, Netflix, Hulu and so much more. As well as Google Cast and Google Assistant being included here.
On the audio front, it’s also no slouch, coming in with Dolby Atmos available out of the box. Now you might still want to use a soundbar, but it’s not needed.
TCL QM8 Mini LED TV – AmazonThe post TCL’s stunning 65-inch QM8 Mini LED 4K TV crashes to its lowest price ever appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

The new JBL Soundgear Sense earbuds feature an impressive design

At the IFA tech event, JBL showed off their new Soundgear Sense earphones which are a showstopper. This pair of earphones comes with an impressive design that allows users to hear the world around them while listening to music. In addition to the open-ear design, this pair of earphones offers users a detachable neckband for extra functionality.
According to JBL, this new pair of earphones is a better option for transparency mode on most competing brands. The open-ear design of these new pairs of earphones makes them great for transparency while listening to music. However, this design is not the only feature that stands out about this new JBL product that’s making the headlines.
This is not the only audio product that JBL is bringing to their fans around the world. The Soundgear Sense earphones launched alongside the new Live 770NC and 670NC headphones and the PartyBox Ultimate speaker. In this article, you will find out more details on the new open-ear earphones that JBL will soon be retailing to its fans around the world.
Specifications and details on the new Soundgear Sense earphones
One of the top features of this pair of earphones is its design, which allows users to interact with the world around them. For this feature, JBL put their OpenSound Technology, which uses air conduction for an impressive listening experience. With this technology, JBL is setting a new audio standard for products that make use of this form factor.
Users of this product will be able to stay in touch with their environment even while listening to music. Listening to music with this pair of earphones won’t get any interference from outside noise and sounds. To do this, JBL uses its 16.2mm drivers on the new Soundgear Sense earphones along with a bass-enhancing algorithm.
The earphones also come with 4 microphones that help users enjoy clear and crisp calls. For connectivity, the new Soundgear Sense earphones use Bluetooth 5.3 technology and LE audio support. With a single charge, these earphones can last up to 24 hours, which is impressive.
Those looking to purchase a new pair of earphones for workouts would benefit from the IP54 sweat, splash, and dust resistance this product offers. Its hybrid design is also very impressive as it gives users options while listening to music. Users can hang the JBL Soundgear Sense earphones on their necks or put them over their ears.
This is possible thanks to the optional neckband and the ear hooks that come as standard. Lots of customizations can be done to the audio quality on these earphones directly from the JBL Headphones app. All these features make the new open-ear earphones from JBL a true stunner.
Sales of this product are already live in Europe, but fans in America would need to wait. For them, sales will kick off next year, which is a bit late and annoying. However, fans can now purchase the new JBL speakers regardless of the region they live in.The post The new JBL Soundgear Sense earbuds feature an impressive design appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Apple wants to ditch customer support on social media

Almost all companies globally provide their customers with support on social media or online chatbots. However, Apple is reportedly going in the opposite direction and wants to eliminate customer support on its social media accounts and Support Community.
As reported by MacRumors, citing sources familiar with the matter, Apple will soon stop supporting its customers through X (Twitter), YouTube, and Support Community. Thus, you’ll no longer be able to receive any kind of online support from these channels.
The change takes effect October 1, 2023, and starts with the @AppleSupport handle on X. One of the sources told the outlet that Apple customers will no longer receive any human response from this account. Instead, they receive automated messages that guide them toward other ways of contacting the company for support.
Apple to eliminate online customer support on social platforms and its Support Community
The decision also extends to the Apple Support channel on YouTube. Apple already responded to the technical questions in the comments of each video. However, from October 1 onwards, no technical assistance will be provided to customers on that channel.
The tech giant also decided to remove the paid Community Specialist role from the Support Community. The Apple Support Community is an online forum where users can receive help from experts in the company’s products and services.
The question that now pops up is how Apple wants to support its customers technically. Well, the company has offered the affected employees to move to a phone-based support role. This means you must pick up the phone and call the company instead of writing your issue online. To justify the decision, Apple reportedly argued that customers prefer phone-based support.
The sources familiar with the matter said Apple’s decision caused anger and frustration among the affected employees. The company only allows employees with a medical exemption to remain on chat-based support roles.
Employees who can’t work in the phone-based support roles should leave the company. The transition could be completed by November, and employees receive training to provide phone support.The post Apple wants to ditch customer support on social media appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

WhatsApp is working on a major interface redesign

After rolling out a bottom navigation bar on Android, WhatsApp is now working on another major interface redesign. It’s adopting Material Design 3 UI elements and adding chat filters. The top app bar is also seeing a few changes, including a white background.
Spotted by reliable WhatsApp insiders at WABetaInfo, the planned interface redesign of the popular Meta-owned messaging app adds four self-explanatory chat filters to the top of the chat list: All, Unread, Personal, and Business. The All section will show all your chats like you see today. If you want to quickly check all your unread messages, you can switch to Unread. Likewise, the Personal and Business sections will filter chats based on account type.
Additionally, WhatsApp has redesigned the top bar to add an extra menu button to the right, next to your profile avatar. The background color of this space, as well as the top status bar, has also been changed from green to white (everything appears black when dark mode is turned on, so this change only applies to light mode). With this change, the WhatsApp logo on the app bar switches its color from white to green.
WhatsApp has also updated the logo font and made it bolder. Chat titles (contact names or group names) also appear a little bolder in the screenshot shared by the publication. The report says the company has frequently updated some of these design overhauls, so what we are seeing today may not be the final design.

This WhatsApp interface redesign is still under development
WhatsApp was first spotted working on this redesign in June. The same source found the new interface within WhatsApp beta version for Android. The changes weren’t available to users, but the company was laying the groundwork behind the scenes.
Over two months later, WhatsApp isn’t yet ready to roll out the redesigned interface to users, not even in the beta channel. The changes are still under development. However, WhatsApp beta version for Android has proof that the development work has progressed significantly, with the company further refining the interface.
As the new report notes, a similar redesign is in development for the iOS version of WhatsApp as well. A beta rollout of the changes may not be too far off now. If you want to try out the latest WhatsApp updates early on your Android smartphone, you can sign up for beta here. Now proceed to update the app from the Google Play Store. You can click the button below to download the latest version of WhatsApp.
DOWNLOAD WHATSAPPThe post WhatsApp is working on a major interface redesign appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Meta may let you avoid ads on its apps for a fee

A large part of the social media experience is wading through advertisements. They’re a blessing and a curse depending on what’s being sold to you. If you don’t like seeing ads while using Meta’s social media platforms, then you might be able to skip them. According to The New York Times (via The Verge), Meta might let you avoid ads while using its social media platforms.
Now, this is a big if, as details on this are very scarce. The report states that Meta could be planning on letting users in Europe pay a fee to stop seeing ads on Facebook and Instagram. This would be similar to how YouTube cuts the ads when you sign up for Premium.
Meta may let you avoid ads, but it’s not likely
For the time being, we don’t know what the company is planning right now. There’s not much information supporting this leak, and there’s a chance that the company won’t do it.
If Meta does decide to bring this change, we expect it to stay in Europe. That sounds like a bummer to other people around the world who’d happily pay to avoid seeing ads. However, there’s a reason.
The EU is passing some strict data regulations that compel big companies like Meta and TikTok from collecting data from their users to create targeted ads and content. This is why TikTok brought a chronological feed in Europe.
This could be Meta’s way of keeping the peace with the EU’s regulatory body. Letting people pay to eliminate ads gives them a way out of the company’s data collection vacuum.
Meta has been on the EU’s bad side for years for how adamantly it collects its users’ data. A big part of Meta’s income comes from selling advertisements to users. Collecting data on its users helps its algorithm optimally target ads at people who are more likely to click on them. The more people click on the ads, the more money Meta gets.
At this point, we’re not sure whether Meta will go through with this. Only time will tell.The post Meta may let you avoid ads on its apps for a fee appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Best of IFA 2023: Lenovo Legion Go

The Lenovo Legion Go will be the best handheld for first-person shooters
This week, Lenovo officially revealed the Legion Go, its handheld gaming PC, and wow is this going to be one of the best handhelds on the market when it launches. First of all, it’s packed with features. A high-performance CPU and GPU option, three different storage configurations, a large 8.8-inch display with a 2,560 x 1,600 resolution and up to a 144Hz refresh rate. And that’s just the tip of the iceberg.
Where it really gets cool is with the ‘FPS mode.’ This is a special dedicated mode you can enable when you want to play first-person shooter titles. Like Overwatch, Destiny 2, Valorant, Counter Strike 2 and more. And this is what sets it apart. Lenovo designed the Legion Go to have detachable controllers. And when you detach them, you can pop out the Legion Go’s kickstand and prop up the handheld.
Now, you can play games like this and go no further. But if you’re playing a first-person shooter, you can flip a switch on the bottom of the right controller that says “FPS” and this will turn on ‘FPS mode.’ But there’s one more cool feature to this.
The Legion Go comes with a tiny base you can slot the right controller into. This turns the right controller into a sort of vertical mouse for higher precision aiming. And this is all thanks to the optical eye on the bottom next to that toggle. The left controller meanwhile continues to be for your movement. The whole thing is a game changer. And if you’re a fan of first-person shooters, this is absolutely the handheld for you.
Lenovo promises extended gaming sessions without frequent recharges
One of the biggest issues with handheld PC gaming is battery life. Lenovo is promising that players will have less of an issue with this thanks to its 49.2Whr battery capacity. What’s more, you’ll be able to get extended play without compromising too much on performance or visuals, and if you do need to juice it back up, the Legion Go supports a Super Rapid Charge Express feature. So it charges the battery up lightning fast. Specifically, up to 70% in just an hour.
It also features thermal throttling and a power bypass mode that lessens battery degradation while it’s plugged in. Plus, the Legion Go’s multiple modes of play make this a pretty versatile little PC. You’re going to want one. And so will we. And that’s precisely why we gave the Lenovo Legion Go the Best of IFA 2023 award this year. Lenovo earned it.The post Best of IFA 2023: Lenovo Legion Go appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

This Intel gaming desktop CPU is available at an insane discount

There is a massive discount on one of Intel’s best gaming CPUs from the last couple years available right now, specifically the Intel Core i9-12900K CPU, and this is a deal you absolutely want to take advantage of if you need a CPU upgrade.
Currently the Intel Core i9-12900K CPU can be picked up for $320. This CPU normally retails for about $700 so it’s currently a little over half off. That is a screaming discount on a powerful top-tier CPU from Intel’s 12th generation of processors. It features up to a 5.2MHz max clock speed with 16 processor cores and 24 processor threads. It’s definitely a big boy CPU if you want to add more power to your PC to handle computing anything you can probably throw at it. Whether that be games, or just general multitasking.
It’s also not the only Intel CPU on sale right now. As one would have it, there’s actually a pretty big Intel sale going on over at Amazon with multiple different 12th Gen Core i9 models available at a discount. This includes the Core i9-12900KS for $349, the Core i9-12900KF for $319.99, and two Core i9 CPU bundles that come with an Intel Arc GPU. You will find additional bundles with Arc GPUs as well. Coming with Core i7 and Core i5 CPUs. Another really good deal is the Intel Core i5-12600K CPU which is on sale for $178 down from $197.
It’s not a big discount, but a little extra savings is always nice. And this is a great CPU option for those looking at a more entry-level gaming desktop. Whatever you decide is the right CPU for your setup, you can grab any of the ones available by clicking the link below.
Intel CPU and GPUsThe post This Intel gaming desktop CPU is available at an insane discount appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Best of IFA: Sony Xperia 5 V

Sony brought a powerful phone with a more powerful camera to IFA 2023
IFA 2023 is going on right now, and we’re seeing some fun and innovative tech. Sony attended the event and it showed off the next generation of its flagship Xperia phones. The company showed off the Sony Xperia 5 V at IFA.
Sony doesn’t really make phones for the average consumer anymore. The modern Xperia phones are for mobile photography nerds who want a customizable experience. These phones are great for people who tend to use the manual mode in their cameras.
The Xperia 5 V makes an appearance at IFA
This iteration might look similar to last year’s model, but there’s a notable difference. This iteration only has two cameras on the back. The Xperia 5 IV has three cameras on the back.
While this is the case, it’s not a downgrade. The Xperia 5 V uses the same 52MP main Exmor T backside illuminated (BSI) Type 1/1.35-inch stacked sensor that was present in the Xperia 1 V. That’s a notable upgrade, and it can switch between a 24mm and 48mm focal length. This means that it can take on the role of a 2x zoom camera. As for the other camera, this is a 12MP ultrawide camera.
Aside from the camera tech, this phone has some pretty robust specs. Starting off with the display, the Xperia 5 V has a 6.1-inch FHD+ OLED display. It uses Sony’s proprietary TV Bravia X1 image quality engine. This means that visuals will look amazing with this phone.
This phone will use the snapdragon 8 Gen 2 SoC, so you can expect flagship-grade performance. That’s backed up by up to 12GB of RAM and 128GB of storage. The base storage isn’t amazing, but there is still microSD card storage. Moving onto the battery, we’re looking at a 5000mAh cell. That’s pretty average for most phones nowadays.
Sony was able to bring a powerful phone with a powerful camera to the show, and this is why it got the Android Headlines award for Best of IFA.The post Best of IFA: Sony Xperia 5 V appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Pixel 8 series will retain the physical SIM slot and come with new Night Sight video

The Pixel 8 series is on the horizon, and rumours about the new device have been circling throughout the internet. Among these rumours was the possibility that Google might adopt Apple’s approach and ditch the physical SIM slot altogether. However, according to a new report from 9to5Google, the Pixel 8 series will keep the physical SIM slot while also incorporating an eSIM expansion, similar to the older Pixel devices.
New Night Sight video
Video capture has consistently been one of the Pixel series’ major drawbacks, partly due to the processor’s limitations in post-processing. However, with the new Tensor G3, featuring new Arm cores across the board and the addition of UFS 4.0 storage, Google is looking to make a significant leap in video capturing capabilities with the introduction of a new Night Sight video mode. This feature would not only help solve the current problem of lower frame rates in nighttime videos but would also enable users to capture exceptional videos in even the most challenging lighting conditions.
However, it is important to note that Google isn’t the only smartphone maker with this feature. Oppo, for instance, has been offering a 4K night video mode on its premium smartphones for some time, albeit with the help of its custom image-processing chip.
Improved camera hardware
When talking about the camera hardware, the Pixel 8 series will feature the new Samsung ISOCELL GN2 50MP sensor as the main camera, marking an improvement over the GN1 used in the Pixel 7. Additionally, the Pixel 8 series will introduce a new 64-megapixel ultrawide camera powered by Sony’s IMX787 sensor, while the 10.8MP telephoto lens will remain unchanged, retaining its 5x optical zoom capability.
Furthermore, Google is also revamping the user interface of the Pixel camera app, as leaked screenshots indicate that the interface for photo and video controls will vary depending on the selected mode.
The Pixel 8 series will launch on October 4th.The post Pixel 8 series will retain the physical SIM slot and come with new Night Sight video appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Top 10 Most Popular Knowledge Articles for Horizon, WorkspaceONE, End User Computing (EUC), Personal Desktop for August, 2023   

KB articles VMware

Tweet Get answers and solutions instantly by using VMware’s Knowledge Base (KB) articles to solve known issues. Whether you’re looking to improve your productivity, troubleshoot common issues, or simply learn something new, these most used and most viewed knowledge articles are a great place to start.   Here are the top 5 most viewed KB articles … Continued

The post Top 10 Most Popular Knowledge Articles for Horizon, WorkspaceONE, End User Computing (EUC), Personal Desktop for August, 2023    appeared first on VMware Support Insider.

Source: vmware

You might not want to buy an Exynos-powered Samsung Galaxy S24

After shipping the Galaxy S23 series with a Snapdragon chip globally, Samsung is returning to its usual dual-chip strategy next year. The Galaxy S24 series will use the Exynos 2400 in some markets and Snapdragon 8 Gen 3 in others. Or maybe the Korean firm will use the Snapdragon processor on the Ultra model globally and equip the other two models with Exynos. However, if a new rumor is accurate, you might not want to buy an Exynos-powered Galaxy S24, no matter which model it is.
According to X (formerly Twitter) tipster @Tech_Reve, the Exynos 2400 is no match for the Snapdragon 8 Gen 3 in both CPU and GPU performance. Multi-core CPU performance is just about the same or slightly tilted towards the latter, but Exynos lags in single-core performance. This is despite Samsung abandoning its cost-cutting measures in place for the past several years and putting in everything it has. The fault is in the Korean firm’s manufacturing process and chip design, the tipster claims.
The Exynos 2400 is based on Samsung’s 4nm 4LPP+ process node. The Snapdragon 8 Gen 3, on the other hand, is manufactured by TSMC using its 4nm N4P process. Both solutions reportedly have similar power consumption, but the former is “slightly inferior” in overall CPU performance. The new Exynos chip’s GPU power consumption, meanwhile, is higher than the Snapdragon counterpart. Its stability is also said to be at 90%, slightly lower than Snapdragon’s 95%.
Samsung took a year gap and still couldn’t fix its Exynos problems
Long story short, Samsung hasn’t yet completely eradicated its Exynos woes. Its in-house processors have long had power, performance, and thermal issues. They always underperformed competing Snapdragon solutions. Despite this, the company continued its dual-chip strategy for years. However, with growing public backlash, it eventually gave up this year and went all-in with Snapdragon for the Galaxy S23 series. Samsung then went back to the drawing board to fix the Exynos problems.
A year later, it has come up with a new Exynos chip that’s still inferior to the latest Snapdragon. Well, neither chip is official yet, so we don’t know the full picture. But leaks at this time should be mostly accurate. The source of this information has a decent track record of Samsung leaks too. While it’s still advisable to wait for the official data about the Exynos 2400 and the Snapdragon 8 Gen 3, things aren’t looking that promising for Samsung at this point. We will let you know when we have more information about these chips.The post You might not want to buy an Exynos-powered Samsung Galaxy S24 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

HP launched the Pavilion Plus 16 laptop with NVIDIA RTX graphics

HP has a ton of high-quality computers on the market, and the company also has some more affordable offerings. While the Pavilion Plus series of computers do get up there in price, they don’t shoot too far above the $1,000 mark. The company just introduced the new HP Pavilion Plus 16. This is the first 16-inch computer in the series, according to Engadget.
This series of computers could be thought of as the premium mid-rangers of HP’s computers. There’s a 14-inch variant that starts at $849.99. It comes with Windows 11 Home, a 13th-gen Intel Core i5 processor, 256GB of onboard storage, 16GB of RAM, and a 2.2K IPS LCD display.
The HP Pavilion Plus 16 comes with NVIDIA RTX graphics
As stated, this computer is the first in the series with a 16-inch display. Actually, the screen is 16.5 inches diagonal, and it’s an impressive panel. It’s a 2.2K OLED display with a 120Hz refresh rate. So, you can expect whatever you’re looking at to pop.
Moving onto the internals, this computer will have a selection of processors, but it will max out with the 13th-gen Intel Core -7 processor. Also, if you’re looking to do some gaming on this computer, the top model of the computer will use the NVIDIA GeForce RTX 3050 GPU. This is a pretty high-end GPU, and it will be able to run a ton of the games that are on the market.
Aside from those internals, the HP Pavilion 16 Plus has up to 16GB of LPDDR5x RAM and 1TB of SSD storage. Just know that these will be present in the top model of the computer. As for battery capacity, we’re looking at a large 68Wh battery, and the company states that it can last up to 11:45 hours on a single charge for typical usage. If you’re only video-watching, then it should last you to around 15:45 hours.
Moving onto the ports, this computer gives you a nice array. It has two USB-A ports, a USB 3.2 Type-C port, and a Thunderbolt 4 port with USB power delivery. Other specs include B&O audio and Wi-Fi 6E.
This computer starts at $1,000 for the base model. It will arrive sometime in October in Natural Silver and Warm Gold. You’ll be able to pick one up from HP.com, Costco, and Amazon.The post HP launched the Pavilion Plus 16 laptop with NVIDIA RTX graphics appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

PlayStation Portal officially launches on November 15

Sony now has an official release date for the PlayStation Portal handheld. Earlier this month it revealed the official name of the device alongside the pricing, and mentioned it would be available “later this year.”
The $199.99 handheld, which is just a dedicated device for Remote Play on your PS5, has gotten mixed reactions from consumers. Many don’t seem to be thrilled that Sony is launching what is essentially just a way to stream games from your console. Particularly because your phone or tablet can already do that. And there are ways to set up Remote Play on things like the Steam Deck too. But there are also no doubt users excited to check the Portal out. And they’ll get to in just a few months.
The PlayStation Portal release date is set for November 15
According to Sony’s blog post, the PlayStation Portal will launch on November 15. Which means it’s just a few months away. That’s right around the time that Sony launched the PS5 back in 2020. Albeit a few days later. Those interested in grabbing one of these on day one can pre-order the PlayStation Portal as of today. It’s available exclusively through PlayStation Direct for the moment. But Sony plans to open up pre-orders for it through participating retailers on September 29.
For the PlayStation Direct pre-orders, you will need to be in specific regions. This includes the US, UK, France, Germany, Austria, Belgium, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Italy, Spain, and Portugal. Then on September 29, consumers in Canada and Japan will also be able to pre-order in addition to anyone in the previous regions.
Interestingly, Sony is only opening up pre-orders for the PlayStation Portal. The two devices it revealed alongside it, which are the Pulse Elite headset and the Pulse Explore true wireless earbuds, don’t have release dates yet. Nor can you pre-order either device currently. You’ll want to keep an eye on these though if you plan to pick up the Portal. Because they both come with PlayStation Link technology. And you’ll need that to wirelessly connect them to the PlayStation Portal.The post PlayStation Portal officially launches on November 15 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Top 10 Most Popular Knowledge Articles for HCX, SaaS, EPG Emerging Products Group for August, 2023   

KB articles VMware

Tweet Get answers and solutions instantly by using VMware’s Knowledge Base (KB) articles to solve known issues. Whether you’re looking to improve your productivity, troubleshoot common issues, or simply learn something new, these most used and most viewed knowledge articles are a great place to start.   Here are the top 5 most Linked KB articles … Continued

The post Top 10 Most Popular Knowledge Articles for HCX, SaaS, EPG Emerging Products Group for August, 2023    appeared first on VMware Support Insider.

Source: vmware

Nintendo is launching a Mario Red Edition Switch OLED

Nintendo has a new Switch OLED coming in the form of a Mario Red Edition. It’s set to lunch later this year and will be commemorating the release of Nintendo’s next Super Mario game. Super Mario Bros. Wonder.
This isn’t the first time Nintendo has released a red Switch console. Back in 2021 it launched the Mario Red & Blue Edition Switch. The main difference of course is this new Mario model is the OLED version of the console. The color scheme is a tad different as well. As there’s no blue incorporated in it. Instead, the entire console is red and black themed. As a special-edition console, the design is pretty basic. You won’t find any Mario-themed design stuff anywhere except for on the back of the dock, where there’s a little Mario silhouette in the corner.
And once you fold down that little backplate where you find the ports, there’s a bunch of little coins. Think of these as a neat hidden detail. They aren’t in full view, but you’ll know they’re there and that makes it special.
The Mario Red Edition Nintendo Switch OLED launches October 6

Similar to the way Nintendo launched the Tears of the Kingdom Switch OLED a few weeks before the launch of Tears of the Kingdom, it’s doing the same thing here. The Mario Red Edition Switch OLED will officially launch on October 6.
Super Mario Bros. Wonder meanwhile will launch on October 20. So if you were looking to pick up the game and wanted the special OLED Switch to play it on, you can get the console itself a few weeks ahead of time. It’ll be $349.99 just like any other Switch OLED and you can actually pre-order it right now if you like. It ships on October 6 (the day of release), though it’s also entirely possible that it could ship early.
It also seems you can only get it from Nintendo directly, or from retailers like Best Buy. Though it may eventually show up on Amazon and at other retailers as well.
Nintendo Switch OLED Mario Red Edition – Best BuyThe post Nintendo is launching a Mario Red Edition Switch OLED appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Aqara debuts new Matter-compatible Smart Home Products at IFA 2023

Aqara showed up in Berlin for IFA with a couple of new smart home products, and they are all Matter-compatible. Which is a huge deal, as we start to move towards the Matter protocol taking over the smart home.
First up is the Smart Lock U200. This is a new smart lock that actually doesn’t require you to change your actual lock. This is a retrofit solution, giving users a keyless home access option. As this does work with a NFC card, or specific NFC-enabled mobile devices. You can also use a PIN, fingerprint or a mobile app to get into your home.
Aqara has also announced its Camera E1. This is a smart camera for your home. It’s a Pan/Tilt Camera with 2K resolution. It does support Apple HomeKit Secure Video, as well as Amazon Alexa and Google Assistant. So you can use your voice to control it. Aqara is using WiFi 6 and Bluetooth 5.2 here for connecting to your home and smart devices.
Next up is the Dual Relay Module T2. This is is a versatile home automation solution, and gives you control over various devices, including lights, motorized window coverings, garage doors, boilers, electric heaters and even underfloor heating. It was built on Zigbee 3.0, and supports Matter-over-Bridge, and other major third-party platforms.
Aqara’s Ceiling Light has a LED status light
Many have been wanting smartphones to bring back a LED status light, but Aqara did it with their ceiling light. It’s a multi-color light, and has about 16 million vibrant colors, which enables users to set ideal lighting for different moods and occasions. It does have Matter-over-bridge support, and works with other major platforms.
The ring around the light can serve as a status indicator when linked to other smart home products. This would allow you to program the outer link to show a specific color when one of your other smart devices detects an issue, such as a leak or an open door.
These are all set to be available in the coming months, but Aqara did not mention specific availability dates, nor pricing.

The post Aqara debuts new Matter-compatible Smart Home Products at IFA 2023 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Driving the global conversation about “Open Source AI”

The Open Source Initiative (OSI) continues the work of exploring complexities surrounding the development and use of artificial intelligence in Deep Dive: AI – Defining Open Source AI, with the goal of collaboratively establishing a clear and defensible definition of “Open Source AI.” OSI is bringing together global experts to establish a shared set of principles that can recreate a permissionless, pragmatic and simplified collaboration for AI practitioners, similar to what the Open Source Definition has done.

Building community momentum and support

We’ve gathered a significant amount of support from groups all over the world. Most recently, Google has increased its financial commitments to support this urgent initiative. Timothy Jordan, Director of Open Source and Developer Relations at Google, stated “Google is excited to continue our support of the Open Source Initiative and, more broadly, of open source developers. We look forward to the open collaboration involved in drafting the Definition of Open Source AI and hope it will help accelerate innovation in this space.” 

For Catherine Stihler, executive director of Creative Commons “It’s critical to develop shared definitions about what it means to contribute to the commons, including through open source. The participatory process organized by the OSI is an important way to find the common values shared by the widest variety of organizations and people around the world.” 

While Mark Collier, COO, OpenInfra Foundation said that “The next decade of open infrastructure will be built hand-in-hand with AI. The OpenInfra Foundation and the community engaged with its projects, including OpenStack, Kata Containers, and StarlingX, is focused on defining how AI will play its role. We’re excited to participate in OSI’s process to find—as soon as possible—a common baseline and definition that all of us can rely on to further the values of ‘open’ to the AI field.”  

Other organizations, like GitHub, Amazon, OSS Capital, Weaviate and Sourcegraph also believe in this effort and are supporting the process with generous donations. OSI also welcomes individual donations.

“Deep Dive: Defining Open Source AI” webinars

After gathering a group of people from Mozilla Foundation, Creative Commons, Wikimedia Foundation, Internet Archive, Linux Foundation Europe, OSS Capital, and the OSI board in June 2023 in San Francisco, OSI is kicking off our webinar series to hear from more experts.

The presentations series identifies foundational principles of “Open” in the context of AI and will contribute to the conversations and collective thinking. The topics were selected for their focus on precise problem areas in AI and offer clear suggestions for solutions based on their expertise in many areas. 

Webinars will be held Tuesday through Thursday between September 26 and October 12 (daily schedule coming soon). Each session will include a live Q&A with attendees. Registration is free and single registration gains you access to all webinars in the series. 

Comment on the Draft of the “Open Source AI Definition”A draft of the Open Source AI Definition will be available for public discussion at All Things Open, on October 17. Interested parties can review the full schedule of the global drafting and review process.
The post <span class=’p-name’>Driving the global conversation about “Open Source AI”</span> appeared first on Voices of Open Source.

Source: opensource.org

AYANEO is launching its first Android handheld next week

AYANEO is best-known for its windows gaming handhelds, but now it’s also releasing its first-ever Android handheld with the Pocket Air. Taking everything it’s learned from the handheld gaming PCs it built over the last few years, AYANEO set out to build the perfect Android handheld for those that enjoy mobile games and want a nice, inexpensive gaming unit for Android games and cloud gaming services like GeForce NOW or Xbox Game Pass. It can also work well for retro titles and emulators.
In fact that’s one thing the AYANEO Pocket Air will probably be perfect for. Emulating retro games. Android has really good support for emulator apps. So if you’re on the hunt for a dedicated handheld for that specifically, check out the Pocket Air. AYANEO is also really leaning into the retro vibe with it too. As the only available colorway it seems is the ‘Retro Edition.’
Unlike yesterday’s AYANEO KUN windows handheld. Which comes in three colors. With the Retro Edition Pocket Air, the design scheme looks to be based on the Nintendo Famicom (the Japanese version of the NES). And that comes through pretty well with the off-white shell, red buttons, and aged yellow joysticks. AYANEO even throws in some red joystick caps.
Is the AYANEO Pocket Air the perfect companion for Android gaming?

It just might be. Since this is for Android games the specs don’t need to be super powerful. As even the most demanding mobile games are pretty well optimized. That being said, the specs here aren’t too shabby. It’s running a MediaTek Dimensity 1200 processor and comes with a 5.5-inch 1080p AMOLED display. There’s also a fairly large 7,350mAh battery inside to keep this running all day. Best of all though is the svelte build. AYANEO designed this to be slim, really lightweight, and ultra portable. It’s called the Pocket Air for a reason. Because it fits in your pocket. Well, probably not all pockets but it can fit in your pocket.
Although, that probably isn’t all that comfortable so you should still stuff this thing into a bag if you have one. For buttons you have the pretty standard setup. Triggers and bumpers up top, four action buttons on the right face, a d-pad on the left, and dual joysticks. The joysticks and triggers are also hall sensing. And for the joysticks that means no drift.
AYANEO is opening up pre-orders for the Pocket Air on September 6 via Indiegogo and the price will start at $279 for the early bird pricing. Retail will start at $319, and it can go up to $519 if you get the 12GB RAM model with 512GB of storage.The post AYANEO is launching its first Android handheld next week appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Top 10 Most Popular Knowledge Articles for SRM, vSan, and Core Storage for August 2023    

KB articles VMware

Tweet Get answers and solutions instantly by using VMware’s Knowledge Base (KB) articles to solve known issues. Whether you’re looking to improve your productivity, troubleshoot common issues, or simply learn something new, these most used and most viewed knowledge articles are a great place to start.    Here are the top 5 most viewed KB … Continued

The post Top 10 Most Popular Knowledge Articles for SRM, vSan, and Core Storage for August 2023     appeared first on VMware Support Insider.

Source: vmware

Meet 'Dreams', Snapchat's AI selfie platform

AI is really big in the tech industry nowadays, and it’s made its way into social media. According to The Verge, Snapchat just introduced its new AI selfie tool called Dreams. You’ll use this platform to make AI-generated selfies.
Snapchat is no stranger to artificial intelligence. Earlier this year, the company unveiled My AI. This is the ChatGPT-powered chatbot that lets you have a conversation with a fictitious chatter. This feature is available to all users, so you can use it today.
Snapchat Dreams will let you take an AI selfie
Right now, people are enjoying the whole AI selfie craze. People will take a selfie and have an image generator produce copies of that photo in different styles. There are other apps that can do this, but it was only a matter of time before Snapchat jumped on the train.
In order to access Dreams, you’ll need to go to the Memories section. There, you’ll upload a series of photos of yourself. The app wants you to upload pictures of your face from different angles.
When you do that, it will then give you the generated images. This sounds like an interesting to the app, but there’s one catch; using it won’t be entirely free.
Your first pack of Dreams (eight individual photos) will be free. However, if you want additional packs, you’ll need to pay for them. Each pack costs $1 each. That’s not too bad, but it will definitely turn some people away from it.
Right now, this feature is only available in Australia and New Zealand. It’s going to make its way over to other markets as time goes on. If you’re excited about this new feature, then you’ll want to keep your app updated.
Before you sign up for this feature, just know that you’re giving Snapchat permission to collect the images of you.The post Meet 'Dreams’, Snapchat’s AI selfie platform appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Level up your gaming PC with this Skytech desktop that's $200 off

A gaming PC can be an expensive investment if you get a rig with high-end specs, but that doesn’t mean you can’t save money, like on this deal from Skytech on the Archangel desktop. Normally $1,399.99, you can currently get the Skytech Archangel PC for $1,199.99. Saving you $200 on a desktop with performance-heavy specs.
Now this is a prebuilt machine so if you’re new to PC gaming or have just never built one yourself before, this is a really great solution. It comes with some pretty good specs including the NVIDIA GeForce RTX 4060 Ti GPU. As well as an Intel Core i7-12700F CPU, a 1TB NVMe SSD, 16GB of DDR4 3200MHz RAM, and a 600W Gold power supply.
Everything is wrapped up in a fairly sizeable mid-tower case with lots of room for airflow. Speaking of airflow, there’s multiple fans. One rear fan and three front fans to really push air through the system and keep things cool. There’s an AIO in there too to help keep the CPU temps down. All-in-all it’s a nice little setup for the price. And because it’s a desktop PC, you can easily get to and swap out parts if you ever need to replace parts or want to upgrade.
Plus, the RGB lighting is a nice bonus if you like that style. RGB can be found on all the fans as well as the AIO, RAM, and underside of the case. And the tempered glass panel on the side ensures you can see everything. If you want to snag this awesome gaming desktop deal for yourself you can do so at the link below.
Skytech Archangel Gaming PC – AmazonThe post Level up your gaming PC with this Skytech desktop that’s $200 off appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Galaxy S23 outsold Galaxy S22, but Samsung's foldable sales dropped

Samsung has reportedly sold over 18 million units of the Galaxy S23, Galaxy S23+, and Galaxy S23 Ultra combined so far. Compared to the Galaxy S22 series, sales have grown 23 percent in the first six months after launch. The growth over the Galaxy S21 series is close to 30 percent.
Samsung’s Galaxy S23 phones have more demand than the Galaxy S22
According to market research firm Korea Investment & Securities Co. (via @Tech_Reve), the cumulative sales figure of the Galaxy S23 series for six months reached 18.63 million units. As expected, the Ultra model is the most popular of the trio. It accounted for almost half of all sales (8.89 million units). The base Galaxy S23 sold 6.43 million units, while Samsung moved 3.31 million Galaxy S23+ phones off its shelves during this period.
Sales of Samsung’s foldable smartphones, meanwhile, marginally declined over the past year. A year after their launch, the Galaxy Z Fold 4 and Galaxy Z Flip 4 have cumulatively sold 9.31 million units, the report states. In comparison, the combined sales volume of the Galaxy Z Fold 3 and Galaxy Z Flip 3 in the first year was 9.65 million. The Flip model outsold the Fold in both generations.
Samsung sold 5.76 million units of the Galaxy Z Flip 4 in the first year, while the Galaxy Z Fold 4 sold 3.55 million units. The sales figures of the third-gen Flip and Fold models were 6.32 million and 3.32 million. This isn’t surprising considering the lower price tag of the Flip, as well as its appealing style statement. The Fold model is more of a multitasking device and costs almost twice as much as the Flip.
Samsung recently launched the Galaxy Z Fold 5 and Galaxy Z Flip 5 with a handful of upgrades. Both models feature a redesigned hinge that allows the devices to fold flat without a gap. The Flip model also has a bigger cover display. Early signs have been promising, with shipments growing about 75 percent from the same period last year. Time will tell whether Samsung manages to hit its sales target for the latest foldables.
Samsung may struggle to repeat the feat with the Galaxy S24 next year
Samsung shipping the Galaxy S23 series with a Snapdragon chip globally may have helped boost the sales this year. People who usually got the Exynos processor grabbed the opportunity to upgrade their phones. However, Exynos is making a return on the Galaxy S24 series. Considering its ill reputation, Samsung may struggle to maintain the growth trajectory of its flagship smartphones next year. The Galaxy S24 series will launch in early 2024.The post Galaxy S23 outsold Galaxy S22, but Samsung’s foldable sales dropped appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Best USB-C Wall Chargers for Samsung's Galaxy Z Fold 5

Samsung has launched the new Galaxy Z Fold 5, and it once again does not come with a USB-C charger in the box. Which is not a huge surprise, most OEMs ditched that a couple of years ago. Luckily, you can get a decent USB-C wall charger for not a whole lot of money. And since the Galaxy Z Fold 5 does not support anything faster than 25W, you won’t need to spend top-dollar for a much faster charger. Though, it’s a good idea to do that, as you can use it to charge other things like laptops, tablets, etc.
In this list, you’ll find a number of great USB-C wall chargers that you can pick up for the Galaxy Z Fold 5, some of which are as low as $10.
Samsung 25W Travel Adapter

– Price: $19.99
– Buy: Samsung.com
This is the charger that Samsung shipped with the Galaxy S20 and Note 20 series last year. So it’s not necessarily a new charger from Samsung, but one that you might already have in your home. And it works great with the Galaxy Z Fold 5.
This is a USB-C PD charger that can charge up to 25W. Now if you are charging something else that might not charge at up to 25W it will charge at that rate. Basically, it is backwards compatible. Which is a nice addition.
Finally, the Samsung 25W Travel Adapter is available in two colors: White and Black.
Samsung 25W Travel Adapter – Samsung.com
Belkin 25W Power Delivery USB C PPS Wall Charger

– Price: $19.99
– Buy: Amazon
This wall charger from Belkin does support up to 25W charging speed, and it uses PPS in addition to Power Delivery. PPS is what Samsung uses for the faster charging speeds. So you will for sure get the full 25W charging out of this one. And it’s the same price as the Samsung charger above.
It will also work with almost any other USB-C device, as this is backwards compatible, even with phones that are not USB-C PD.
Belkin 25W Power Delivery USB C PPS Wall Charger – Amazon
Spigen 40W Dual USB C Wall Charger

– Price: $29.99
– Buy: Amazon
Spigen also makes chargers. Yes, the company you know for making great cases for literally every phone ever made. They also make a few chargers that are worth buying, like this one for the Galaxy Z Fold 5.
This is a dual-port USB-C PD charger that can charge at up to 40W. You won’t get 40W out of each port, but rather combined. It will do 25W at most, but if you’re using both ports together, it’ll be closer to 20W each.
Spigen 40W Dual USB C Wall Charger – Amazon
RAVPower 61W PD 3.0 Wall Charger

– Price: $21.99
– Buy: Amazon
Another great option for the Galaxy Z Fold 5, especially if you have other devices you need to charge. The RAVPower 61W charger has a 61W USB-C PD port and a 12W USB-A port. However, if you are using both ports, the USB-C port becomes a 45W port. That’s just how power works.
It is backwards compatible to the 25W charging that the Galaxy Z Fold 5 is able to support. But it’ll also work for charging USB-C laptops and even tablets, which is really useful. Making this charger quite versatile.
RAVPower 61W PD 3.0 Wall Charger – Amazon
Anker GaNPrime 735 Charger

– Price: $59
– Buy: Amazon
This is one of our favorite USB-C chargers, because it’s a new GaN charger so it’s much smaller while still boasting 65W of power.
This particular charger has two USB-C ports and a USB-A port. So you’re going to be able to charge multiple devices at the same time. While this will charge at faster speeds than 25W, your Galaxy Z Fold 5 won’t charge faster, as it will only ask for 25W. But this is a good charger to take traveling to charge your laptop, smartphone and maybe a smartwatch too.
Anker GaNPrime 735 Charger – Amazon
RAVPower 65W 4-Port Desktop USB Charging Station

– Price: $49
– Buy: Amazon
Since we are all working from home right now, this charger from RAVPower is a really great one to buy. This is a four-port desktop USB charging station. It has two USB-C PD ports available that can charge at 65W total. So it could charge your laptop and your Galaxy Z Fold 5 at the same time.
It also sports two USB-A ports for charging other devices slower, like a smartwatch or a fitness tracker.
This makes this a must-buy for a home office setup. Especially since we all have plenty of products that we need to charge daily.
RAVPower 65W 4-Port Desktop USB Charging Station – Amazon
CHOETECH 20W PD Fast Charger

– Price: $12.99
– Buy: Amazon
Here’s another 20W charger, and as mentioned above, you won’t see much of a difference between 20W and 25W charging. This is a smaller one, so you can still use it to travel with. Toss it in your bag, without it taking up a lot of space.
It is available in both black and white, however for some reason, the black one is actually $2 more expensive.
CHOETECH 20W PD Fast Charger – Amazon
UGREEN USB C Charger 20W PD Fast Charger

– Price: $13.99
– Buy: Amazon
This 20W charger from UGREEN is also fairly cheap, coming in at under 25W. If you’re wondering why so many chargers are capped at 20W, it’s because of the iPhone. But it’ll still work fine on the Galaxy Z Fold 5. And slower charging is actually better, as your battery will last longer in the long run.
At 20W, you should see about 50% charge on your Galaxy Z Fold 5 in about 30 minutes.
UGREEN USB C Charger 20W PD Fast Charger – Amazon
Anker PowerPort III Duo Type C Foldable Fast Charger

– Price: $29.99
– Buy: Amazon
The PowerPort III Duo from Anker is a really good option. This sports two USB-C ports, that support PowerIQ 3.0 (that’s Anker’s proprietary fast charging spec). We’re looking at 36W on this one, so it’s not so much a super fast charger, but it can charge two devices simultaenously.
The plug on the PowerPort III Duo does also fold, making this great for traveling. As you won’t need to worry about the plug getting bent while you have it in your bag.
Anker PowerPort III Duo Type C Foldable Fast Charger – AmazonThe post Best USB-C Wall Chargers for Samsung’s Galaxy Z Fold 5 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Samsung confirms Galaxy Z Fold 5 Thom Browne Edition launch

Samsung has announced a launch date for the Galaxy Z Fold 5 Thom Browne Edition. The limited edition foldable will debut next Thursday, September 7. The company revealed the date through a teaser on X (formerly Twitter). It described the phone as “a unique vision of innovation, at its most elegant.” It added that the device will be “as striking as it is inviting.”
That’s all Samsung has said about the Galaxy Z Fold 5 Thom Browne Edition so far. Last week, the company posted a short teaser video for the phone on X, asking fans to “take a seat at the Thom Browne table for a celebration of a new experience in design and innovation.” It featured a piece of Fold-shaped cardboard with the New York City-based fashion designer’s iconic red, blue, and white stripes.
The latest teaser, meanwhile, shows the Galaxy Z Fold 5 in black. Samsung likely doesn’t want to reveal the Thom Browne-themed external customizations ahead of the limited edition foldable’s official unveiling next week. If history is any indication, the back panel should feature the iconic Americana stripes. Samsung has launched Thom Browne Editions of the Galaxy Z Flip, Galaxy Z Fold 2, Galaxy Z Flip 3, and Galaxy Z Fold 3 in the past.
The Korean firm didn’t team up with the fashion designer for its fourth-gen foldables last year. So there were no speculations of the Galaxy Z Fold 5 or the Galaxy Z Flip 5 getting Thom Browne-themed customizations. However, Samsung has other ideas. It kept mum initially but has now confirmed a limited edition variant of the Fold model. The Flip model may get similar treatments later, possibly in partnership with some other brand or individual.

A unique vision of innovation, at its most elegant – the new @ThomBrowne Edition will be as striking as it is inviting. Save the date for September 7th. #GalaxyxThomBrowne pic.twitter.com/DrQjdJkoMU
— Samsung Mobile (@SamsungMobile) August 29, 2023

The Galaxy Z Fold 5 Thom Browne Edition may come in a bundle
Samsung’s limited edition Galaxy smartphones usually come in a bundle. It includes other products like smartwatches, TWS earbuds, S Pen (for supported models), and charging hubs in the same package, often with similarly customized exteriors. The company may do the same for the Galaxy Z Fold 5 Thom Browne Edition. We will get a confirmation soon.
Of course, it will be the same Galaxy Z Fold 5 that you can already buy from Samsung and other retail channels. The only difference will be its colors and other external customizations. The same goes for other products in the bundle as well. With all the extra efforts put into pulling it off, the limited edition device will cost more than the standard version. The regular Galaxy Z Fold 5 starts at $1,800.The post Samsung confirms Galaxy Z Fold 5 Thom Browne Edition launch appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Major news and media outlets are blocking ChatGPT

We’ve seen the chilling headlines: “Another company laid off a huge chunk of its staff and started using AI instead”. This is the sad reality that we have to face, but there’s hope out there. Several news outlets and media companies are actually blocking OpenAI’s ChatGPT from accessing the information on their sites.
This news comes from CNN, and CNN’s Oliver Darcy described this accurately as a Cold War. It makes sense; there’s a lot of tension hovering around AI and the potential future. AI companies are building up their arsenal of potentially deadly weapons, and those opposed are mounting their defense.
Major news outlets are blocking ChatGPT
It’s reassuring to know that not all companies are all in on this new AI revolution. Notable news outlets such as CNN, Insider, The New York Times, Reuters, Bloomberg, The Washington Post, ESPN, Axios, ABC News, The Gothamist, and The Atlantic have blocked ChatGPT’s crawlers from accessing their content. This also includes publishers such as Vox Media, Condé Nast, and Hearst.
The list doesn’t stop there. Disney is also opposed to ChatGPT accessing its content. This shows that there’s a long list of companies that are on the offense against ChatGPT and the like.
It’s a matter of morality and legality
Danielle Coffeey, President and chief executive of the News Media Alliance spoke about why these companies are resistant to forking over their content. It’s not only because generative AI proves to be a threat to the news industry. Long-standing news outlets “are on solid legal ground when it comes to copyright protections.”
Of course, if you’re a major news organization, and you’ve put out groundbreaking news stories, you’d want to protect your content. Generative AI does threaten to put writers out of their jobs. It’d be a pretty sour blow to end up training the very AI that’s threatening jobs for writers.
At this moment, we’re not sure about what will happen next as AI progresses. However, it’s nice to know that not everyone purchased a ticket to the AI hype train.The post Major news and media outlets are blocking ChatGPT appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Samurai Shodown gets an Android release as a Netflix game

Samurai Shodown is now available for Android if you wanted another fighting game to add to your library. It’s the latest mobile published by Netflix. Which already houses a large list of games for people with memberships.
Although you can probably tell, this is the Samurai Shodown reboot. The one that launched in 2019 for consoles and the new defunct Stadia. As well as PC in 2021. Graphically and mechanically it was meant to be brought in-line with more modern fighting game titles like Street Fighter V. Obviously, the graphics aren’t going to be quite as good as they would be on PC or consoles. But with the advancements in phone hardware and game development software these days, it’ll be pretty close. One thing to note however, is that while you can pick this exact same game up on Steam for $49.95, it’s free on mobile with your Netflix membership.
So if you’re planning to play it, consider picking it up on Android instead if you want to save $50. There is one downside though.
Samurai Shodown on Android doesn’t support controllers
For some people this is going to be a big no-no and will be the reason they decide not to try it on mobile. And that’s understandable. The touch controls are good, but in fighting games there’s generally just no substitute for having physical controls with a tactile feel. Unfortunately, the game has been designed to force touch controls and there is no support for controllers at all. Near as we can tell you can’t even use the new Virtual Control Mode from the Razer Nexus app with a Kishi V2 controller.
After numerous attempts to get it to work, the overlay disappears almost instantly. And there’s no way to assign any of the controls. So it looks like you’re stuck playing this one with touch controls if you want to play it on Android. As far as features go you have multiple modes to play including online, story, battle, and practice modes. There’s also a leaderboard option for checking in-game player rankings, and a gallery for viewing collected items like artwork, BGM, and videos. Overall it’s a pretty good game for free and worth a try if you enjoy the fighting genre.
Samurai ShodownThe post Samurai Shodown gets an Android release as a Netflix game appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

watcOS 10 Beta 8 is now available for download

In addition to launching the eighth beta for iOS 17 and iPad OS 17, Apple has also released the eighth beta of watchOS 10 today. While we are nearing the end of the beta phase here, we should see one more beta next week and then beta 10 would be the release candidate (likely coming shortly after the iPhone event).
So this version of watchOS 10 should be pretty much final. Apple is really focused on squashing bugs with watchOS 10 now, and not adding new features to the update.
This is the developer beta, but we expect to see the public beta launching in a few hours. The last few weeks, we’ve seen the public beta launch a bit later on the same day as the developer beta.
What’s new in watchOS 10?
Out of all of the new platforms that are coming this fall, watchOS 10 is likely the biggest update. It got a pretty big redesign, though many might say it still looks the same. And, fair. The two major changes that Apple made is with the new widgets. And how you access quick settings. So now when you swipe up on your watch, you’re not opening quick settings, but instead opening a widget stack. Currently, it’s all third-party widgets, but we’d expect that to change in the future.
And now, to open quick settings. You need to press the side button. The app drawer has also been redesigned a bit. It still has a honeycomb-like layout, but now it is scrolling up and down, instead of all around. So it’s a bit easier to get around.
Apple has also included a couple of new watchfaces – Palette and Snoopy. Which many are in love with.
This should be a pretty stable build of the beta, so if you’re willing to check it out on your Apple Watch, now is a good time to do so. Just head to Settings > General > Software Update. Switch from iOS 16 to the iOS 17 Developer Beta or Public Beta. And then you can download the update.The post watcOS 10 Beta 8 is now available for download appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Top 10 Most Popular Knowledge Articles for VMware Cloud for August, 2023   

KB articles VMware

Tweet Get answers and solutions instantly by using VMware’s Knowledge Base (KB) articles to solve known issues. Whether you’re looking to improve your productivity, troubleshoot common issues, or simply learn something new, these most used and most viewed knowledge articles are a great place to start.   Here are the top 5 most viewed KB articles … Continued

The post Top 10 Most Popular Knowledge Articles for VMware Cloud for August, 2023    appeared first on VMware Support Insider.

Source: vmware

Modern Warfare II is adding a Play Again feature to multiplayer

Call of Duty: Modern Warfare II is adding a Play Again feature to multiplayer with Season 05 Reloaded. The game’s mid-season update will add new social features for better experiences within the multiplayer gameplay mode along with tons of other new content. In addition to some balances and bug fixes.
Some of that new content will be three new operator bundles. All of them tracer packs. The first will be a third hip hop artist as part of the 50 years of hip hop celebration with the 21 Savage bundle. The second operator will be Lara Croft, teased last week. And the third operator bundle will see a return of Mace to the fray with another new skin for him as part of the bundle. Of course if you don’t already have Mace unlocked, buying this bundle will allow you to use him with the associated skin.
All three bundles will feature weapons with tracer rounds. And come with some extras like the Tomb Buggy vehicle skin, stickers, emblems, and more.
Modern Warfare II multiplayer gets Play Again and friend recommendation features

Social gameplay experiences are getting an improvement in Modern Warfare II multiplayer soon. A new Play Again feature is being added so that you can choose to stay together with team members you may have enjoyed playing with. This new feature was initially part of Warzone and is making the jump to multiplayer modes.
There’s also a friend recommendation feature being added that’s aimed at helping you find other people to play with. Activision says recommendations are made on multiple factors. Including people that play at certain times. It also looks at people who are part of the same social groups and people who enjoy playing the same modes. Additionally, the Friend Recommender will suggest friends of friends. While also notifying you of why the suggestion was made. Both of these features should be live when Season 05 Reloaded comes online.
Season 05 Reloaded launches August 30

The end of season 05 is still a few weeks away. But the reloaded mid-season update is close at hand. It officially goes live on August 30 at 9am Pacific Standard Time. It’ll be available on all platforms at that time as well.
With this content patch players can also engage in a new Gunfight – Snipers mode. It’s like regular gunfight, but with snipers and marksman rifles only. As with every new mid-season update a few new weapons will be added to the game too. This time around players can unlock a new melee weapon, – the pickaxe. Alongside the Lachman Shroud SMG and the 9mm Daemon pistol.The post Modern Warfare II is adding a Play Again feature to multiplayer appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Google Calendar users will now see Microsoft Outlook attendees

Microsoft Office and Google Workspace are two of the most popular office suites on the planet. There’s no doubt that there are people who use both in their professional lives. The issue is that these services don’t really talk to each other. However, according to 9To5Google, Google Calendar can now show Microsoft Outlook attendees.
It’s not uncommon for users to be thrust in to more than one software ecosystem for their job. Folks could use Google Docs to type up documents and share this document to their colleagues using Microsoft Outlook. That’s why this feature is so welcomed.
Outlook users have the ability to invite Google Calender users to meetings. This is useful if you’re inviting someone from a different company to a meeting in yours. However, the experience hasn’t been the greatest. When the Google Calendar user receives the invitation, the Outlook user’s name wouldn’t be visible in the list of attendees. Obviously, you’d want to know who’s going to be attending your meeting.
Now, Google Calendar users will be able to see Outlook attendees
Google announced this in a short blog post. When an Outlook user organizes a meeting, they will be visible as the meeting organizer to the Google Calendar user. This will eliminate any guessing game as to who’s going to be involved in the meeting.
This feature stands apart from most other Workspace updates, as it’s available to all accounts. It applies to all plans whether they’re paid or not. It’s rolling out starting today, so there’s a chance that you won’t see it right away. If you don’t see it, then you’ll want wait a little bit. This is a gradual rollout that’s going to be taking place over the next two weeks.
Speaking of Google Workspace
If you operate a business, and you’re thinking about taking it to the next level, then you should getting a Google Workspace membership. You’ll gain access to a ton of useful business tool and additional features that free users don’t have. You can find out more by filling the link below.
Learn more about Google WorkspaceThe post Google Calendar users will now see Microsoft Outlook attendees appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Top 10 Most Popular Knowledge Articles for ESXi, VCenter, Automation Operations, vCF, and vCD for August, 2023   

KB articles VMware

Tweet Get answers and solutions instantly by using VMware’s Knowledge Base (KB) articles to solve known issues. Whether you’re looking to improve your productivity, troubleshoot common issues, or simply learn something new, these most used and most viewed knowledge articles are a great place to start.   Here are the top 5 most viewed KB articles … Continued

The post Top 10 Most Popular Knowledge Articles for ESXi, VCenter, Automation Operations, vCF, and vCD for August, 2023    appeared first on VMware Support Insider.

Source: vmware

Galaxy Z Fold 5 teardown shows its new shock dispersion layer

Samsung‘s new book-style foldable, the Galaxy Z Fold 5, is a relatively minor upgrade over last year’s Galaxy Z Fold 4. The new model folds flat without a gap, but that’s pretty much the only notable change on the outside. On the inside, the company has redesigned the hinge to allow for gapless folding. It also claims to have added a shock dispersion layer under the folding screen. Popular YouTube channel JerryRigEverything‘s Galaxy Z Fold 5 teardown video gives us a look at these internal changes.
Zack Nelson, the man behind this YouTube channel, is known for torturing and tearing apart brand-new phones to test their durability and show their internal setups to everyone. The Galaxy Z Fold 5 has already passed through Zack’s rigorous durability tests, holding surprisingly strong during a forceful reverse bending. He has now put the foldable under his knife. The shredding of the phone begins at the front this time around, with the hard plastic bumper around the display coming out first.
Once the bumper is gone, you can pull out the display. However, Zack fails to remove it without damage. Under the display assembly, Samsung has pasted a thin layer of foam onto the metal frame of the phone. The strips of black cushions have circular cutouts. Zack says these strips likely have nothing to do with the new shock dispersion layer. Instead, these could be to compensate for variances and tolerances in the internal structure. So the digging continues to find the shock dispersion layer.
The Galaxy Z Fold 5’s new shock dispersion layer is nothing major
Zack pulled off a few layers from the display assembly, including the digitizer for the S Pen, but couldn’t find any changes over the Galaxy Z Fold 4. It turns out that the thin layer of foam on top of the metal frame is what we have been looking for. Samsung is seemingly calling it a shock dispersion layer. It will probably help the foldable absorb shock when it falls on its folding display. Nothing major, but it should make a difference. As Zack puts it, “any protection is good protection.”
The YouTuber then proceeds to tear apart the Galaxy Z Fold 5 in his traditional style — from the back. The back panel comes off fairly easily but the cover display is broken. Once we are inside, we can see that Samsung has provided pull tabs for both battery units. These tabs make removing the battery effortless. After removing several other components, we can finally see the hinge. It has accumulated some dust that Zack put on the phone in purpose during his durability test.
However, the Galaxy Z Fold 5’s dust-laden hinge still works fine without any trouble. That’s nice to see. The foldable doesn’t have an official IP rating for dust resistance, but a little bit of dust won’t do much damage. You can Watch the full teardown video below.
The post Galaxy Z Fold 5 teardown shows its new shock dispersion layer appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Samsung's 5K ViewFinity S9 monitor is available for purchase

Samsung today has begun selling its first 5K monitor, the ViewFinity S9, available directly through Samsung’s website and at participating retailers. Samsung officially announced the ViewFinity S9 monitor at CES 2023 back in January. It’s a new premium monitor with a sleek design that should easily fit into any setup.
Now this isn’t a gaming monitor so it’s not what we’d suggest if you’re looking for something of that nature. But it is going to be perfect for home offices, a work display, or even schools. It’s a 27-inch panel so it’s not super large. It also boasts high color accuracy with DCI-P3 99% color gamut. Which means it should be nice for photo editing, video editing, digital art and the like. To top that off it’s Pantone Validated, with Samsung saying it has “authentic reproduction of more than 2,000 Pantone colors and 100 Pantone SkinTone shades on screen.” It can also easily be turned vertical if you need it to.
The Samsung ViewFinity S9 is available for $1,599.99
Just because this isn’t a gaming monitor and because it’s smaller, doesn’t mean it’s inexpensive. In fact, being a 5K display, and Samsung’s first one at that, was reason enough to suspect this would have a high price tag.
The interesting thing is that while this isn’t really a gaming monitor, it can still be used for some light or casual gaming. It boasts a 60Hz refresh rate. And that’s not bad for many games. It also comes with Samsung Gaming Hub pre-installed. And you can use that to connect to services like Xbox Game Pass, GeForce NOW and more for playing games in the cloud.
The monitor will support both Windows and Mac and comes with some neat extras. Like the modular slim 4K webcam that can be attached and detached. There’s also a remote for menu and setting management. Additionally, it has a slim metal build. It just might be the perfect display for digital artists and photo editors.
Samsung ViewFinity S9 – Best Buy
Samsung ViewFinity S9 – Samsung
The post Samsung’s 5K ViewFinity S9 monitor is available for purchase appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Android Runtime is now 30% faster thanks to the latest update

The latest update Google realseed for Android Runtime (ART) can significantly increase the app launch speed on the operating system. ART also received the ability to update itself through the Google Play system independently.
A faster app launch significantly impacts user experience, and it has been a competitive edge for Apple since the first iOS version was released. When it comes to Android, users sometimes complain about apps that launch slowly. To address this, Google has updated Android Runtime.
As a side note, Android Runtime is responsible for running applications on your Android device. Since Android 12, ART has received its updates via the Google Play system. With ART 14, it can get independent updates without any further intervention.
“Google Play system updates enhance the Android Runtime (ART), which is the engine of the Android OS. These updates boost performance, provide the latest security patches, and standardize core OpenJDK APIs across numerous devices, including all Android 12+ and soon Android Go devices.” Serban Constantinescu, Product Manager at Google, said in his blog post.
Google updates Android Runtime, resulting in a 30% faster app launch
A more efficient ART leads to a faster app launch, resulting in a better user experience. Google claims the Android Runtime now brings a 30% faster app launch. This could be a very crucial addition to Android. Improved memory usage, more efficient bytecode compilation, and security fixes are some more benefits that ART 14 update brings to your device.
Constantinescu added that the testing princess of the upcoming Android Runtime version involves “18 million APKs and running app compatibility tests, and startup, performance, and memory benchmarks on a variety of Android devices that replicate the diversity of our ecosystem as closely as possible.”
ART 14 will be released to all compatible devices in the coming months. The package includes OpenJDK 17 support, a new compiler, and runtime optimizations for better performance with reduced code size.The post Android Runtime is now 30% faster thanks to the latest update appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

AMD announces Radeon RX 7800 XT and 7700 XT for 1440p gaming

This week AMD announced two new graphics cards aimed squarely at the 1440p gaming market, the Radeon RX 7800 XT and the Radeon RX 7700 XT. Both cards are aiming for that 1440p sweet spot while still being able to deliver high-performance at an affordable price point.
The cost of these cards sits at $449 for the 7700 XT and $500 for the 7800 XT. That puts the 7700 XT at about $50 more than NVIDIA’s RTX 4060 Ti, but you are getting more performance. The 7800 XT meanwhile should deliver better performance than NVIDIA’s RTX 4070. But it’ll also cost $100 less. And that savings is tempting enough to at least consider choosing AMD over NVIDIA if you’re due for an upgrade. Especially so if you’re already running an AMD card.
AMD claims the Radeon RX 7800 XT is the “ultimate GPU for 1440p gaming”
The big claim here is that with this card, you can handle games at 1440p resolution at a stable 60 frames per second. If the card can live up to those claims, then $500 seems like a pretty good price point for someone who wants to push above that 1080p resolution while still having more than playable performance.
The RX 7800 XT comes with 16GB of GDDR6 VRAM, a game clock of 2124 MHz, a boost clock of up to 2430, and utilizes 60 AMD RDNA 3 compute units. AMD says the card offers up to 20% more performance than comparable cards. The RX 7700 XT meanwhile has 12GB of GDDR6 VRAM, has 54 compute units, a game clock of 2171MHz, and a boost clock of up to 2544. Both cards should have no problem hitting 1440p with stable frame rates based on AMD’s data. But your mileage may vary a bit.
Both cards come with a free copy of Starfield
This is, not surprising at all if you think about. AMD is the official partner of Starfield. It’s made a Starfield GPU. So naturally when buying its latest graphics cards, Starfield was the game of choice to add in to entice buyers. If the price points and promises of 1440p gaming at 60 frames per second wasn’t enough, then maybe a free copy of Starfield to play at those values does the trick. AMD is hoping so at least. Both cards will be available on September 6 from both AMD and from its partners including ASRock, ASUS, Biostar, Gigabyte, PowerColor, Sapphire, Vastarmor, XFX, and Yeston.The post AMD announces Radeon RX 7800 XT and 7700 XT for 1440p gaming appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

A new Sony Xperia smartphone is set to launch next week

From a recent post to the brand’s X page, it is clear that a new Sony Xperia smartphone is coming. This device will launch in Japan on September 1st, which is just a few days away. The launch event will be live-streamed via Sony’s official YouTube channel for all to watch and engage with.
However, the post giving away these details doesn’t say anything regarding the device. So fans are left in the dark regarding what they should expect from this coming product launch event. But from the images given, it might be safe to expect this product to be a smartphone, as it shows off what seems to be a smartphone rear camera lens.
Due to the lack of details on the said product, many might say that this launch event will bring an already existing product to the global market. However, that isn’t the case, as there’s still one more important device in the brand’s line-up that is still yet to launch. That device is none other than the Xperia 5 series entry for this year.
Sony Xperia smartphone entry, the 5 V, will take on the competition in a few days
Already, netizens have got to see the Xperia 1 V and 10 V smartphones. The first is Sony’s most expensive and feature-packed smartphone, while the latter is the more affordable entry. In terms of pricing and features, the coming Xperia 5 V will sit between the 1 V and the 10 V.
Sometime last month, a promotional video of this device found its way to the internet. A Reddit user was able to get their hands on this video and share it via their page. This video showed off the design of this device with its dual camera setup and Sony finish.
The design concept and color choice of the video also match that of the image Sony shared via their X page. For specifications, there is little known about the coming device, but it will be a flagship device. From its Geekbench listing, it is clear that this device will launch with the Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 processor.
It’d also launch, packing 16GB worth of RAM capacity that might be paired up with up to 1TB storage. Another leak concerning this device also claims that it’d support 33W fast charging. This charging speed might charge up a 5000mAh battery capacity which it might carry over from its predecessor.
Following typical Sony fashion, this might be a very compact device with a sub-6.5-inch screen size. In comparison with its predecessor, this device will improve upon its performance and storage. Other details on its specifications will be made available as the coming Sony Xperia smartphone launch date approaches.
The post A new Sony Xperia smartphone is set to launch next week appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Android users can now send HD videos through WhatsApp

After HD photos, WhatsApp now lets you send HD videos as well. The new feature started rolling out recently and should be available to everyone over the next few days. You should get it with the latest update for the app.
WhatsApp has been long working on the ability to send photos and videos in HD quality. The Meta-owned messaging app added support for HD photos to the beta version of the app in early June. After a couple of months of beta testing, the feature rolled out publicly on Android and iOS last week.
Around that time, Meta said that it would soon add support for sending HD videos via WhatsApp. As promised, the feature is now here. It works the same way as for photos. Once available, you will see an HD button in the top toolbar when sending a video over WhatsApp. Tap on this button and the video will go through in higher quality with less compression. The recipient will also see an HD label on the video.

The latest WhatsApp update adds the ability to send HD videos
This feature is available for some of us here at Android Headlines. We can see that WhatsApp lets you send videos in 1280×720 resolution maximum. If your video is of higher resolution, the app will compress it to 720p. By default, videos shared via WhatsApp are compressed to 480p resolution. You must select the HD button every time before sending videos. Meta doesn’t let you make this a default behavior.
If you want to share full-quality photos and videos over WhatsApp, you can always do that by sending them as documents. The app doesn’t compress documents. However, media files are compressed by default to reduce the strain on servers. Compression also helps users save internet data and storage space on their devices. Higher-quality media have bigger file sizes and consume more data when sent over the internet.
Speaking of the size, WhatsApp shows the file size for each quality. You can compare the size of the compressed file to that of the HD quality before sending it. This is available for both photos and videos. If you use WhatsApp to communicate and share photos and videos with your friends and family, you might find this feature useful. You can click on the button below to download the latest version of the app from the Google Play Store.
DOWNLOAD WHATSAPPThe post Android users can now send HD videos through WhatsApp appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Starfield modders will be able to create planets and quests

Starfield is already an extremely large game with tons of quests and over 1,000 planets to explore, but it’s bound to be much bigger, as modders will be able to create entire planets. Granted it isn’t clear how long it will take for modders to upload their creations for others to enjoy. But the fact that it’s coming is great news for enthusiasts of the game. In an interview on the Bethesda Twitch channel on August 24, Bethesda Softworks Senior VP of Global Marketing and Communications Pete Hines confirmed that modders will have a pretty robust list of things they can do.
This includes creating large planets, new questlines, new stories and more. Alluding to a potentially massive wealth of content for players to sink their teeth into.
Of course, it’s not clear what players will be able to do on these planets. But presumably it’ll be anything you can do on any other planet that was put in there by Bethesda Game Studios.
Starfield modders creating planets will make the game infinitely more vast
Every time players get a brand-new space game of this magnitude, it pushes us ever closer to the dream of true interstellar space exploration. Sadly for anyone playing Starfield space exploration of this scale will never happen in real life. But that’s ok because it can happen in Starfield. If over 1,000 planets wasn’t enough for you, patience is key here.
Especially since by the time you actually explore all of them, modders will likely have already created more for you to explore. Making the game infinitely more vast than it is now. If you think about it, the sandbox potential is staggering. And with the mod community hard at work, you can look forward to hours of exploration and nothing else.
And that’s just with new planets. Now add in newly mod-created quests and stories and there’s a very good chance you’ll be playing this game for years to come. Provided you like it enough to do so. Starfield officially releases on September 5 for PC and Xbox. It’ll also be available through Xbox Game Pass. And if you pre-order the premium edition you can play on September 1.

CONFIRMED: Modders can add NEW PLANETS, QUESTS & STORIES to #Starfield pic.twitter.com/7frRd9sCeQ
— Darrius Fears (@TheRealDfea) August 24, 2023
The post Starfield modders will be able to create planets and quests appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

What is RAM and why is it important?

With devices coming out with more and more RAM, that’s a statement that you’ve probably come across multiple times. To the uninitiated, it could just be another number in the torrent of specs being flung at you when a new phone, tablet, or computer comes out. But, what is RAM? Why is it important? How does having more of it make a device more powerful?
This is what we’re going to explain here. In this piece, we’re going to go over these questions and more that you might have about RAM. Knowing this could be make-or-break when choosing your next device. This could help you understand what’s running your computer, gaming console, phone, or other device. So, let’s dive in.
What is RAM?
So, let’s start off with what this term means. RAM is an acronym meaning Random Access Memory. Just like your computer’s storage device (hard drive, SSD, SD card, flash drive, etc.), RAM stores data in the form of binary code. However, it serves a different purpose than storage.
Photo by Umberto on Unsplash
What’s it used for?
Storage is perfect for storing data to be held for extended periods of time. When you install a program on your computer, (let’s say a paint program) you’re going to be using it multiple times over an extended period of time. That program and its files are saved to the storage.
However, RAM is all about the here and now. Let’s say you want to paint using the program. Well, what’s happening? You’re picking colors, drawing lines, adjusting the UI, changing settings, fixing mistakes, picking tools; you’re making quick changes in real-time. The issue is that you can’t access and make changes to your storage that quickly. You need a form of memory that can be changed and affected at a moment’s notice.
This is where RAM comes in. As per its name, it can be accessed randomly. When you open the program, that program is loaded into the RAM so that everything you do will be reflected in real-time. Everything you do in the program affects what’s loaded into the RAM. This doesn’t only apply to programs; many of the basic functions that keep your device’s operating system running are loaded into RAM. If you didn’t have RAM, your device wouldn’t be able to run.
Why more RAM is better
Let’s use an analogy; think of your device as a house. You store a lot of furniture, appliances, devices, and other items in the living room. This is where you live, so you can readily access these items at a moment’s notice, and you NEED to. Now, think of the basement as the storage.; you’re keeping items down there for long periods of time, and you don’t need to access them at a moment’s notice.
When you use programs on your computer, you’re loading data onto your RAM. Imagine this as placing more items inside your living room. The more programs you load up, the more RAM you use. So, imagine loading more items into your living room.
Photo by Aryan Dhiman on Unsplash
Eventually, you’re going to run out of space. When you run out of RAM, your device will start closing programs you had running before to make room for the programs you’re loading in now. This is similar to taking the older items and placing them outside to make room for new furniture.
So, as you can imagine, having more RAM is just like having a larger living room. The more you have, the more programs you can have running without needing to close.
Where does the basement come into play? Well, some devices will actually use some of the storage as backup RAM. A device could have 8GB of RAM and actually borrow several gigabytes from the storage.
Circling back to our house analogy, when the living room gets full, instead of chucking the items on the lawn, you’ll place some of the furniture in the basement to access later. Not every device does this, but it can really help.
What does the “DDR” stand for?
When you see that a new device comes out, you’ll sometimes see the term “DDR”. For example, you’ll see “16GB of DDR5 RAM”. But, what does that mean? Why do companies want you to get hyped about higher DDR numbers?
First, a quick lesson in clock speed
When you’re looking at a CPU’s specs, you’ll typically see its clock speed, a number measured in hertz (Hz), kilohertz (kHz), megahertz (MHz), or gigahertz (GHz). That’s its clock speed. It’s the number of pulses a CPU gives off every second. We won’t dig too deeply into that, as that’s not relevant to the article (here’s an informative video). When each pulse happens, also called a clock cycle, the CPU sends out one or several instructions.
Photo by Bermix Studio on Unsplash
Clock cycles are divided into upbeats and downbeats. Each cycle starts on an upbeat, and the halfway point between each pulse is a downbeat. It’s analogous to clapping hands. When your hands make contact, it’s an upbeat and when your hands are furthest apart, it’s a downbeat.
With that out of the way, let’s talk about DDR
DDR, or Double Data Rate, RAM was invented in 2000, and it took off after just a couple of years. Before, computers used SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random-Access Memory). Both of these terms deal with how and when the RAM sends data to the CPU.
This is where the above lesson comes into relevance. SDRAM was perfectly synced with the CPU; the RAM chip would only send data to the CPU once every clock cycle.
Enter DDR
However, DDR RAM (Dual Data Rate) broke that mold. Not only would it send data on the upbeat, but it’d also send data on the downbeat. This doubled the speed of the RAM, making the rate you can access it much faster.
As time went on, there were new generations of DDR RAM to come out. Each generation increased the speed of the RAM. DDR2 doubled the speed of DDR, DDR3 doubled the speed of DDR2, and so on.
Photo by Liam Briese on Unsplash
Not only did future generations of DDR RAM increase the speed, but they also decreased the power consumption. While they’re small, the chips in your device consume a lot of energy. Every time the RAM sends data to the CPU, it uses a little bit of energy. One cycle doesn’t consume a lot of energy, but remember, cycles happen millions and billions of times every second. That doesn’t matter as much if your device is plugged in, but it can be a factor if your device is on battery.
DDR 1 RAM has an operating voltage of about 2.6V and DDR5 RAM has an operating voltage of 1.1V. That’s about a 56% reduction in power consumption.
What about LPDDR RAM?
LPDDR (Low-Power Dual Data Rate) RAM is designed for mobile devices like phones and tablets. While it has “DDR” in its name, the technology has actually evolved independently from DDR technology. In fact, it’s actually closer to SDRAM in that it syncs with the CPU. It’s meant to consume less energy than DDR RAM, as it’s in devices that are battery-powered.
To wrap things up
That was a rundown of the memory that’s probably powering the device you’re reading this article on. Hopefully, you now have a deeper understanding. RAM technology will improve as time goes on, and you’re now equipped to know what’s coming next.The post What is RAM and why is it important? appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Tomb Raider's Lara Croft will be in Modern Warfare II soon

Call of Duty: Modern Warfare II is officially getting Lara Croft as an operator soon. Further pushing the Call of Duty franchise towards a Fortnite-like style game when it comes to playable characters. Although it’s nowhere near the number of skins Fortnite offers, the Call of Duty franchise is slowly but surely getting operators that are more and more wild. The most recently added operator was Nicki Minaj, following the addition of Snoop Dogg for the celebration of 50 years of hip hop.
It’s also possible for your operator to be a cat. And back during Call of Duty: Vanguard, the game had a collaboration with popular anime and manga franchise Attack on Titan, where your operator could be the Armored Titan. Earlier this year Shredder was added from TMNT. And last month there was a collaboration with The Boys tv show. Realistically, Lara Croft coming to Modern Warfare II feels more on brand and closely themed compared to some of the other operators. Lara Croft is another video game character after all, and her character is famous for wielding dual pistols in many of the older games. So the character at least fits with the theme of a shooter.
And if you pick up Lara Croft when she arrives, she can transfer to Modern Warfare III with the carry forward content.
Lara Croft will likely join Modern Warfare II with the season 05 reloaded update
Season 05 reloaded is still a little bit further out, but this is the most likely time for Lara Croft to show up as an operator. The official Call of Duty X account has already confirmed her arrival in the game. And while there’s no mention of a date, the public posting is a good indicator of Croft’s imminent arrival.
Judging from the gif image that was posted, it appears Lara Croft will be joining the Call of Duty universe in her iconic shorts and tank top, alongside the dual pistols and leg holsters. Players should expect to see a bundle with Croft show up in the near future. And expect to pay around 2,400 CoD points or more for it. As has been the case with most of these special operator bundles, there are likely to be weapons with tracer rounds in them too.
Of course, this is all speculation. But rest assured more details will pop up about the bundle the closer it gets to its release.

Pistols ready. Prepared for drop in. Lara Croft is coming to Call of Duty @tombraider pic.twitter.com/9cYdWDlip6
— Call of Duty (@CallofDuty) August 23, 2023
The post Tomb Raider’s Lara Croft will be in Modern Warfare II soon appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

No Man's Sky Echoes update adds large freighter battles

No Man’s Sky just got its latest update, called Echoes, and it’s a big boy with a chonky list of features, bug fixes and more. This is the cool thing about No Man’s Sky. Although it was released with lots of hype that it didn’t live up to, Hello Games worked tirelessly to turn that around and over the years have dropped more than a few massive updates with lots of new content. Echoes is the fourth huge update for No Man’s Sky in 2023. And although it’s not the biggest update the game has ever seen, there’s a metric ton of new stuff added.
Basically, players will be dining out on this for probably many months to come. A lot of the new additions appear to revolve around combat. For example, there’s now a trench run capability. Allowing players to “swoop directly into the superstructure” of outlaw dreadnaught ships and obliterate their cores. You can also now create and customize your own robotic avatar for gameplay using a mix and match system of different robotic parts. These can also be combined with existing armor pieces.
No Man’s Sky Echoes lets you engage in freighter vs freighter combat
Not only can you battle it out with huge, hulking freighter ships, but freighters are also now destructible. The freighter combat should introduce some nice new experiences. And, because you can destroy them you can reap the rewards. For instance, you can loot every cargo pod on the ship and then destroy it for additional scrap. A new combat HUD has been added as well that allows players to keep tabs on hull integrity of large ships. So you can methodically plan out your attacks.
Additionally, there’s a new race of long-lost robot beings you can encounter. And this ties into some of the new robotic parts you can find for use on your avatar customization. Alongside all of that, there’s a laundry list of even more updates and improvements, such as the foveated rendering for PS5 players using PS VR2. You can read about all of the changes in the official post, then get ready to go play No Man’s Sky.
The post No Man’s Sky Echoes update adds large freighter battles appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

VMware Skyline Advisor Pro Proactive Findings – August 2023 Edition

Tweet VMware Skyline Advisor Pro releases new proactive Findings every month. Findings are prioritized by trending issues in VMware Technical Support, issues raised through post escalation review, security vulnerabilities, issues raised from VMware engineering, and nominated by customers. For the month of August, we released 63 new Findings. Of these, there are 36 Findings based … Continued

The post VMware Skyline Advisor Pro Proactive Findings – August 2023 Edition appeared first on VMware Support Insider.

Source: vmware

Best Samsung Galaxy Watch 6 bands in 2023 – August 24

The Samsung Galaxy Watch 6 is here and if you’re like us, you probably enjoy having multiple bands to swap them out with different outfits, and we’ve rounded up some of the best options for you to choose from.
The Galaxy Watch 6 is Samsung’s latest smartwatch and is just as versatile as ever. Not just with the features it provides for everyday use, but also with the style. The nice thing is you don’t have to worry about which bands may fit the new watch. Because Samsung is using the same size for the lugs on the Galaxy Watch 6 as it did for the Galaxy Watch 5. Meaning if it’s a 20mm band, you can use it with the Galaxy Watch 6. This is great if you already have a 20mm band from the Galaxy Watch 5 or Galaxy Watch 4 that you love.
But if you still want to add an additional band to your wardrobe, there’s lots of choices, and these are the best Galaxy Watch 6 bands you can find.
Galaxy Watch D-Buckle Hybrid Eco-Leather Band

Price: $79.99
Where to buy: Samsung
Samsung’s D-Buckle band debuted last year with the Galaxy Watch 5 Pro. And it’s making a return this year with a new and improved design. The main difference between last year’s D-Buckle band and this year’s is that this year’s is a hybrid eco-leather band. So it has more of a leather look and feel. It still uses the magnetic clasp on the underside for fastening the watch to your wrist, too, and that’s part of what makes this one of the best bands. It’s easy to fasten and easy to take off.
Also new this year is the range of colors. The old D-Buckle band only came in two color options. But Samsung has introduced six color options this time around. Black, Camel, Blue, Cream, Indigo, and Etoupe. Worth noting is that the Blue and Cream colors are only available in the Small/Medium size. While the Black and Indigo colors are only available in the Medium/Large size.
Another new addition, and perhaps one of our favorite things about this band, and all of Samsung’s new bands this year, is the one-click band system. Instead of having to pull on a tiny latch on the underside of the band to retract the pin that locks into the watch lugs, this band features a single button you can press to do the same thing. It’s just easier to work with. Without a doubt, this is one of the best bands for the Galaxy Watch 6.
Galaxy Watch D-Buckle Hybrid Eco-Leather Band
Galaxy Watch Fabric Band

Price: $49.99
Where to buy: Samsung
One of the best bands for the Galaxy Watch 6 is Samsung’s new fabric band option. Samsung is ramping up its efforts to promote better sleep with this year’s watch. Only, sport, metal, and leather bands aren’t always the most comfortable to wear while you sleep. Maybe you just feel like they irritate your skin. Whatever the case, the new fabric bands offer a softer material to have against your skin overnight.
Like the Hybrid Eco-Leather band this one also comes with one-click system making it easy to take on and off. The fabric band comes in four color options too. Black, Blue, Sand, and Lavender. The Lavender is only available in the Small/Medium size though, while the Blue is only available in the Medium/Large size.
For $49.99 it’s not the least expensive fabric band out there but it will be good quality, and the one-click band system makes it worth it.
Galaxy Watch Fabric Band
Ritche Quick Release Leather Band

Price: $20.99
Where to buy: Amazon
Samsung’s Hybrid Eco-Leather bands are nice, but there’s nothing like real leather. And this quick release leather band from Ritche is a great quality leather band that’s not too expensive. There’s plenty to love about this band aside from the affordable price though.
For one, it comes in an insane amount of colors. Including the Toffee Brown with silver buckle we have shown above. In all there are 28 different combinations to choose from. With about ten colors for the bands and multiple colors for the buckle and thread for each of those.
While leather already looks great as is, it’ll get better over time. And that’s another reason why this is one of the best bands for the Galaxy Watch 6. Because the more you wear it, the more a leather patina will develop to change the look of the band’s color and appearance over time. And you can’t really replace that.
Ritche Quick Release Leather band
Galaxy Watch Extreme Sport T-Buckle Band

Price: $49.99
Where to buy: Samsung
There’s a few reasons why we love this band and why you will too. Again, we’re going to mention the one-click band system because let’s be honest. It’s one of the best changes to Samsung’s bands. These new sport bands also feature air holes down the band so you get additional ventilation while wearing the watch.
The improved breathability definitely makes a difference when you’re exercising. Especially if you live in a warm climate and tend to exercise outside. This band only comes in three color options but they’re all nice and should fit any color of the watch you pick up. The colors are Graphite/Titan, Green/Black, and Lavender/White.
All three colors for this one are available in both band sizes too. So you aren’t limited by the size of the band that you need. Which is a nice touch. You can grab this band for $49.99 directly from Samsung.
Galaxy Watch Extreme Sport T-Buckle Band
MobyFox League of Legends Samsung Smartwatch Band

Price: $39.90
Where to buy: Amazon
It’s rare that you can find cool, officially licensed merch like this for daily wear accessories, which makes this League of Legends band from MobyFox that much cooler. And definitely one of the reasons why this is one of the best Galaxy Watch 6 bands you can find.
This particular model comes with a design based on Thresh with colors unique to his character. But if Thresh isn’t your favorite or if you simply like other characters more, or if you’re just in the market for some different colors, MobyFox does have other League of Legends options. There’s bands for Ahri, Darius, Ekko, and Jinx, and then there’s one called Jinx Graffiti and one for Hextech Magic. All but the Darius band also glows under black light, and they all come with unique watch faces as well. MobyFox offers other designs too, including some based on Marvel, Star Wars, Harry Potter, and a couple of unique designs based on Japanese-style art.
These won’t be for everyone but they’re a fun option for people who like a more artsy look. And perfect for anyone who loves games. The band itself is made of a UV-resistant silicone so it’s perfect for everyday wear and comfortable for exercise too.
MobyFox League of Legends Samsung Smartwatch Band
Galaxy Watch Hybrid Eco-Leather T-Buckle Band

Price: $59.99
Where to buy: Samsung
If you don’t like the D-Buckle clasp on the earlier band, Samsung made a version of the Hybrid Eco-Leather band with a T-Buckle too. The nice thing about this band is that you still get the hybrid eco-leather material but you get to save a little money since this one goes for $59.99 instead of $79.99.
It comes in four colors which include Black, Silver, Indigo, and Camel.
Galaxy Watch Hybrid Eco-Leather T-Buckle Band
UPZOBU Metal Milanese Mesh Loop Band

Price: $15.99
Where to buy: Amazon
This metal loop band from Upzobu is a stylish loop band made from stainless steel that comes in multiple colors and has an easy-to-use magnetic clasp. The metal also forms a tight mesh for a really sleek look that goes well with pretty much any outfit. As mentioned it’s available in a few different colors including Black, Rose Gold, Silver, Coffee Brown, and Gold.
With a design like this it’s sure to grab your attention and the attention of others. Plus the price is just right making this not only one of the best Galaxy Watch 6 bands, but also very affordable.
Upzobu Metal Milanese Mesh Loop Band
MYYYxqxa Nylon Sport Band

Price: $9.99
Where to buy: Amazon
A nylon band is a great option for any watch, the Galaxy Watch 6 included. This Nylon Sport Band from MYYYxqxa comes in two different styles, offering you choice in which one fits your look. You might notice these also look familiar. And if so, it’s because they do. As these basically feature the style of Apple’s Alpine Loop and Trail Loop bands for the Apple Watch.
The big difference here obviously is that this will fit your Galaxy Watch 6, and it’s nowhere near the cost Apple charges for its Apple Watch band. As these are $9.99 compared to $99.99. Plus, this comes in way more colors. Overall they’re a great pick for daily wear or for outdoor adventures.
MYYYxqxa Nylon Sport Band
CASETiFY Onigiri&Umeboshi Day to day by FURIIRAKUN

Price: $52
Where to buy: CASETiFY
This is another really cool unique option for anyone who likes adding a little art to their accessories. That being said, this is far from being the only art style band from CASETiFY. It features a cute design of Onigiri and Umeboshi characters and comes in Black and Gray color options. The band itself comes from CASETiFY but the design comes from an artist by the name of FURIIRAKUN. It’s sweat and water resistant and it’s made from a soft and flexible silicone material. So it should be comfortable to wear all day.
It’s a bit spendy at $52 but worth it for the unique design. And if this isn’t particularly your style, well CASETiFY has tons of other options for Galaxy Watch 6 bands. Including single colors, mixed colors, and loads of other designs.
CASETiFY Onigiri&Umeboshi Day to day by FURIIRAKUNThe post Best Samsung Galaxy Watch 6 bands in 2023 – August 24 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Sony's PlayStation arm to buy high-end headphone maker Audeze

Sony today has announced that its PlayStation arm, Sony Interactive Entertainment, will be acquiring Audeze, a maker of high-end headphones who has gained popularity with the gaming crowd.
To be clear, both companies have only entered into an agreement for the acquisition, but the deal hasn’t been finalized yet. That being said, an acquisition like this isn’t likely to be one there’s much of a hold up on. Should the deal go through, Audeze will bring its expertise to the PlayStation ecosystem’s already advanced audio features. In particular the PS5‘s Tempest 3D Audio Tech. “We’re excited to bring Audeze’s expertise into the PlayStation ecosystem, building on the great strides we’ve made with PlayStation 5’s Tempest 3D AudioTech and the Pulse 3D wireless headset,” says Senior Vice President of Platform Experience at Sony Interactive Entertainment Hideaki Nishino.
It’s not exactly clear yet how Sony plans to use Audeze’s experience within the industry. But it wouldn’t be surprising to see Audeze gaming headsets in the future gain an officially licensed PlayStation badge on products. And there’s a good chance future headsets will have special features for PlayStation users.
Audeze will not be a PlayStation exclusive brand
This acquisition will be good for both PlayStation and Audeze. Without a doubt. But it doesn’t mean Audeze is going to be exclusive to the PlayStation platform. On the contrary, it’s exactly the opposite. Much like when SIE acquired Bungie, Audeze will continue to operate independently. It will also continue to release multi-platform headsets. Which means they’ll have products that work for PC and Xbox in addition to PlayStation.
But Sony is clear that Audeze will benefit from being part of the PlayStation ecosystem. Albeit without mentioning specifics here. One thing worth noting is that many of Audeze’s products feature planar magnetic drivers. And Sony just announced its first PlayStation headset to offer planar magnetic drivers on August 23 with the Pulse Elite.
So it seems like Sony is keen to learn from Audeze in this space.The post Sony’s PlayStation arm to buy high-end headphone maker Audeze appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Galaxy SmartTag 2 color options and pricing revealed by retailer

Samsung‘s second-gen smart object tracker, the Galaxy SmartTag 2, is nearing its market release. The company hasn’t officially announced the device but it has popped up on MobileFun, a UK-based accessory retailer. The retailer has revealed the color variants and alleged local pricing of the product. It has also shared a tentative launch timeline and given us a better look at the Galaxy SmartTag 2, which has undergone a complete redesign.
According to MobileFun, the Galaxy SmartTag 2 will be available in Black and White colors. They have the manufacturer part numbers EI-T5600BBEGEU and EI-T5600BWEGEU, respectively. The EIT5600 is the model number of the product. It’s unclear if Samsung will add more colorful options for the tracker later on. The first-gen model, which came in two versions, was available in some brighter shades as well, including Mint and Pink.
The two versions of the original Galaxy SmartTag, which debuted in January 2021, differed in connectivity technologies (and price, of course). The standard version only had Bluetooth connectivity, while the Plus version added UWB (Ultra-Wide Band) support. With Samsung only releasing a single version of the Galaxy SmartTag 2, UWB will come as standard along with Bluetooth.
Coming to the price, MobileFun has listed the Galaxy SmartTag 2 with a price tag of £52.99. That’s a bit higher than what Samsung charged for the Galaxy SmartTag+ (£39/$39.99/€39.90). Perhaps the pricing is inaccurate. That seems more likely when you consider the alleged pricing of a four-pack Galaxy SmartTag 2 (£129.99). We’ll have to wait for confirmation on that. The accurate pricing structure may emerge closer to its launch.
The Galaxy SmartTag 2 is rumored to launch in October
Samsung is reportedly planning to release the Galaxy SmartTag 2 in October. We don’t have a precise launch date yet, but the retailer is confident that the tracker won’t be delayed any further. Meanwhile, it has shared images showing the device’s new design, which we first saw in an FCC certification earlier this month. The Korean firm has made it larger with a big hole where you can easily put a lanyard or key rings.
The Galaxy SmartTag 2 can be tracked using Samsung’s SmartThings Find app. Thanks to UWB support, you can see its location even when the tracker is not in your Bluetooth range. You can create a virtual fence around your home to receive notifications every time it enters or leaves the designated area. The upcoming Samsung smart object tracker is also expected to work with Google’s Find My Device network.The post Galaxy SmartTag 2 color options and pricing revealed by retailer appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Turok 3 and Star Wars: Dark Forces are getting a remaster

As part of Gamescom Nightdive Studios has announced a remaster for both Turok 3: Shadows of Oblivion and Star Wars: Dark Forces. Both remastered versions have loads of upgrades to bring them forward into the modern era of consoles and PCs. This includes things like 4K gameplay and support for 120 frames per second.
Of course, there’s updated support for modern controllers too. Which was a must-have since both games are coming out on multiple current platforms. Including PS4, PS5, Xbox One, Xbox Series X|S, PC, and Nintendo Switch. Neither game has a confirmed release date. But you can wishlist the Turok 3 remaster on Steam right now if you want a heads up when it becomes available for PC players.
For Star Wars: Dark Forces, there’s a handful of improvements according to the trailer. One of these is updated cutscenes that look like they come from a much newer game. Nightdive even shows off comparison shots to display the differences and really drive home how much of an improvement they’ve made. The remaster also includes updated content. Star Wars: Dark Forces is a first-person shooter originally released in 1995. So this remastered version should feel like quite the revival when it releases.
The Turok 3 remaster includes new features
Dark Forces may have updated cutscenes, but it sounds like Turok 3 may be getting more feature updates. According to IGN (via engadget), there will be new features for the game that include updated lighting and rendering, a new heads-up display view, and a new area in the game to explore.
There will also be features included that are specific to certain platforms. Additionally, players can earn trophies or achievements depending on the platform they buy the game on. The Turok 3 remaster is coming soon just like the Dark Forces remaster, and it’ll be launching on all the same platforms. Which includes PS4, PS5, Xbox One, Xbox Series X|S, Nintendo Switch, and PC via Steam.
The post Turok 3 and Star Wars: Dark Forces are getting a remaster appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

You can now use Threads on the web

Since Threads peaked several weeks ago, the platform has been losing active users by the boatload. However, that’s not stopping Meta from pushing forward and adding more functionality to the platform. Threads is now available to use on the web.
This was one of the features that people really wanted from Threads. Most people use social media services on their phones, but being able to log on using a computer is still nice.
Threads for web is available, but how is it?
As you would guess, the web experience for Threads is pretty straightforward. It’s pretty bare-bones compared to Twitter. The feed sits as a slender column in the middle of the screen. There’s empty space on either side of the feed, and that makes it feel pretty empty.
The navigation bar that’s on the bottom of the mobile version sits at the top of the feed. You have your Home, Search, New Post, Notifications, and Profile buttons at the top of the interface. Also, right below that bar, you’ll see the text field to start writing a new post.
On the top right of the UI, you’ll see the button that summons the main dropdown menu. You’ll use it to access your settings, read the About page, report a post, and log out.
On the bottom left, you’ll see the option to switch from the For You feed to the Following feed. Just know that when you reload the page, the feed will automatically switch back to the For You page. That’ll be an issue for people who don’t like the For You feed.
You can go ahead and sign in to the website. Just follow this link and you’ll be taken to the login page. Once you do that, you’ll just use your Instagram credentials to get started. Since this is still in the process of rolling out, there’s a slight chance that you won’t see the site. If you don’t, then you’ll just want to wait a day or two.The post You can now use Threads on the web appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Samsung's Galaxy S23 FE tipped to launch in September

Samsung‘s Galaxy S23 FE has been in rumors for a long time, but it continues to elude the market. There have been contrasting reports about its launch, with rumored timelines ranging from September 2023 to early 2024. A tipster has now thrown their weight behind an early debut of the phone. X or Twitter Tipster Yogesh Brar claims that the Galaxy S23 FE will arrive in September. He has also provided a spec round-up for the phone.
Galaxy S23 FE rumored specs
The Galaxy S23 FE has been subject to an extensive amount of leaks over the past few months. Those leaks have revealed pretty much all of its key specs and features. However, if you haven’t been keeping tabs, here’s what you can expect from Samsung’s next-gen Fan Edition (FE) phone.
Samsung will equip the Galaxy S23 FE with a 6.4-inch FHD+ Dynamic AMOLED with a 120Hz refresh rate. Depending on the market, the device will be powered by Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 8 Gen 1 or Samsung’s Exynos 2200 processor. We are expecting up to 8GB of RAM and 256GB of storage if not more.
The handset will feature a 50MP primary rear camera with OIS (optical image stabilization). It will be paired with an 8MP ultrawide lens and a 12MP telephoto zoom camera with 3x optical zoom support. For selfies and video calls, you get a 10MP camera on the front. Both front and rear cameras should support 4K video recording.
The Galaxy S23 FE will be fueled by a 4,500mAh battery with 25W wired charging support. It will also boast wireless charging (likely 15W). Other highlights include stereo speakers, an official IP rating for dust and water resistance (likely IP68), an under-display fingerprint scanner, and Samsung DeX support. The device will arrive with Android 13 onboard and get updates until Android 17. It will also get regular security updates for up to five years from launch.
It’s unclear if Samsung will release the phone globally in September
This isn’t the first time we have heard about a September release of the Galaxy S23 FE. However, previous rumors suggest that the phone will only arrive in a handful of markets in September. Samsung will gradually bring it to more markets over the next few months, with a global release completed in early 2024. It remains to be seen how accurate are those claims. With September just a week away now, we might hear something from Samsung soon.The post Samsung’s Galaxy S23 FE tipped to launch in September appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Check out these super stylish Switch and Xbox accessories

There are a ton of third-party companies out there that make accessories for today’s gaming consoles, and PDP is one of them. Today, the company just announced its new REALMz line of stylish gaming accessories for the Nintendo Switch and Xbox consoles.
These accessories are some of the prettiest that you’ll see, and they’re themed after several popular franchises. If you’re looking for some amazing-looking accessories, then you might want to be around when the company officially launches them on Friday, August 25.
The REALMz gaming accessories show some of the most popular characters
There are several accessories coming out, and most of them are for the Nintendo Switch. These consist of a wired Switch controller ($39.99), wireless Switch controller ($59.99), wired Switch headset ($39.99), and wired Xbox controller ($49.99).
Now, let’s talk about the designs. The controllers are themed after characters from Sonic The Hedgehog, Pikmin, and Transformers, but the Sonic ones will launch first. The Transformers accessories will hit the shelves on October 13th, and the Pikmin ones will come this Winter.
The controllers are crystal clear with transparent bodies. On the bodies, you’ll see beautiful designs showing the characters. In the images, we see a design with Sonic, one with Tails, one with Knuckles, and one with a red Pikmin. More designs will be available when the products launch.

The buttons are also colored to reflect the characters’ color scheme. You’ll see different colors for the D-Pad/middle buttons, the joysticks/main action buttons, and the shoulder buttons. All of the color combinations represent each character’s individual aesthetics.
Not only are the exteriors of the controllers beautiful, but they also come with little figurines on the inside. That adds another layer of visual flair to the controllers.

To top things off, these controllers also come with embedded RGB lights to push the visuals to the next level. That just means that they’ll look that much more impressive.
These REALMz gaming accessories will be a sight for sore eyes when they launch. Also, if you want to look at more accessories from PDP, you can visit their website here. There are a ton of other amazing accessories that you can look at.The post Check out these super stylish Switch and Xbox accessories appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

The HyperX Cloud III wireless gaming headset lasts for 120 hours

HyperX is announcing a new gaming headset today at Gamescom called the Cloud III, offering players a new wireless option for better gaming audio. The company launched a wired model of the headset back in late May. This new wireless version offers a promising collection of features but one of the standouts is easily its long battery life.
Boasting the ability to last up to 120 hours on a single charge. That means you can game with the headset on for longer periods of time before needing to plug it in. And depending on the type of gamer you are, more battery life might be super important to you. For example, if you stream all day with the headset on.
Or if you play games daily for several hours, then battery life comes in clutch then too. Or course, it’s not all about battery life. And the Cloud III has more to offer than that. It promises a lag-free gaming experience with the included 2.4GHz adapter, and a comfortable fit thanks to plush leatherette earpads and a thick cushioned headband. Speaking of the headband, it’s made from stainless steel, in addition to metal forks and a full metal frame construction. So it should be pretty durable.
The HyperX Cloud III launches today for $169.99
If you’re in the market for a new headset and this sounds like it might meet your needs, you can grab it today. HyperX is selling it at a reasonable $169.99 and it’s available directly through the HyperX US shop. You can also purchase it at Amazon and it’ll be available at Best Buy soon.
In addition to the durability and comfort, the Cloud III wireless has multi-platform compatibility and works with PC, PS4, PS5 and Nintendo Switch. It doesn’t support Xbox but HyperX does offer other headsets that work with the Xbox platform. You can grab the Cloud III in either Black or Black and Red colorways.
HyperX Cloud III Wireless – Amazon
HyperX Cloud III Wireless – HyperX US ShopThe post The HyperX Cloud III wireless gaming headset lasts for 120 hours appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Samsung's 57-inch gaming monitor now has a price

Samsung’s Odyssey Neo G9 57 now has a price, and it may or may not be as costly as you were expecting. The latest gaming monitor in Samsung’s Odyssey lineup is a 57-inch ultrawide behemoth, delivering what Samsung claims is “the world’s first Dual UHD monitor.” Basically what Samsung is saying here is that this is like having two 32-inch 4K displays right next to each other. Because that’s how wide this monitor is. It’s a whole lot of monitor to have hooked up to your setup.
Samsung officially announced the Odyssey Neo G9 57 at CES 2023 in January, but at the time it didn’t mention a price or a release date. Now it’s lifting the curtain on both of those details. Sort of.
The Samsung Odyssey Neo G9 57 will have a $2,499.99 price tag
It’s certainly not the most expensive monitor Samsung has ever released. In more recent times, that honor still belongs to the Samsung Odyssey Ark. But the Odyssey Neo G9 57 won’t exactly be inexpensive either. It’ll officially launch with a price tag of $2,499.99.
And that’s still quite a pretty penny to drop on a gaming display. Though, you might find the money is worth what you get in return. Aside from the Dual UHD resolution in a 57-inch ultrawide panel, it supports a 240Hz refresh rate. It also has connectivity support for DisplayPort 2.1 and HDMI 2.1. Which means you’ll get the most out of your gaming rigs and consoles that are hooked up to it.
As for the launch date, Samsung is a little murkier on this. The display will be available for purchase in October but Samsung doesn’t mention a specific date. It’ll also launch alongside the 2023 model of the Odyssey Ark. In terms of other features, that money isn’t just buying you the Samsung brand name.
This monitor is packed with specs for heightened entertainment. Including the 1000R curve, picture-in-picture and picture-by-picture modes, AMD FreeSync Premium Pro support, and a peak brightness of 1,000 nits.The post Samsung’s 57-inch gaming monitor now has a price appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Even Google Search is coming out with its own Stories-like feature

So far, we’ve seen so many companies emulate the Stories feature that Snapchat unveiled about a decade ago. The next company to do this is actually a bit surprising. Google Search is testing out a Stories feature called Notes.
This seems like such an odd concept, as you use Google search results to find information and not to look for social posts. However, this is more of a way to quickly gather insight on a page before you pull up a result.
This upcoming Google Search feature will remind you of Stories
At this point, we don’t know too much about this functionality. The news comes from two sources, AssembleDebug and 9To5Google. The latter were able to post a video of the function in action. However, at this point, it’s still in testing.
Judging from the place-saver text, it looks like this function is mostly about leaving feedback on web pages. When you go to create a Note, you’ll see the text “What did you think of this link? Keep it friendly and helpful”. So, you’ll be able to post your thoughts on the page.
While you’d be able to do this in text form, making it a Story-like post is a lot more engaging. You’re able to add different styles of text, animated stickers, backgrounds, and images. So, it’s indistinguishable from the sort of Story you’d see on Snapchat or Instagram. You’re also able to “like” another person’s Note.
When you make a post, your profile picture and name will be visible to other people. This could mean that you’ll need to be signed in to Google to leave a Note. Your Google account could act as your profile.
This is an interesting idea, but there are sites that you won’t be able to leave notes on. This goes for sites showing medical information, violence, or pornographic material. We’re pretty sure we know all of the Notes that people would leave on Porn Hub.
Right now, Google is preparing to test this feature, so it won’t hit the public for a while. This is a Google Labs experiment, so you may be able to access it eventually if you join the program.The post Even Google Search is coming out with its own Stories-like feature appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Samsung is readying anew pair of Galaxy Buds

Samsung‘s Galaxy Unpacked event last month brought several devices, but a new pair of TWS earbuds wasn’t one of them. The company hasn’t added to its TWS offerings since August 2022, so this left fans many wanting more. Thankfully, it may not be long before the Korean firm expands its audio products lineup. Dutch publication GalaxyClub confirms that Samsung has a new pair of Galaxy Buds in the pipeline.
According to the new report, the next-gen Samsung earbuds will bear the model number SM-R400N. The publication doesn’t have any other information about the products at the moment. However, the model number does throw some hint at us regarding its potential specs or position in the company’s TWS portfolio. In short, these don’t appear to be flagship offerings under the “Pro” lineup. Here’s why.
The new Samsung Galaxy Buds could be a mid-range offering
Samsung switched from the Gear branding to the Galaxy branding for its TWS earbuds in 2019. The first-gen Galaxy Buds debuted in March 2019. The company followed up with the Galaxy Buds+ in February 2020. It then launched the weird, bean-shaped Galaxy Buds Live in August 2020. While the Buds Live never got a successor, Samsung added a Buds Pro to the lineup in January 2021.
In August 2021, we got the Galaxy Buds 2 as the sequel to the original Buds from 2019. The Korean firm then gave us the Galaxy Buds 2 Pro in August 2022 as the second-gen Pro model. Considering all this, the upcoming buds could be anything: a Galaxy Buds 3, Galaxy Buds 2+, Galaxy Buds 2 Live, Galaxy Buds Live+ or Live Pro, Galaxy Buds 3 Pro, or even something completely new, like a Galaxy Buds FE.
However, judging by the model number (SM-R400N), there’s little chance it will be the Galaxy Buds 3 Pro. As pointed out by the new report, Samsung currently uses the model number SM-R5xx for its Pro-series TWS earbuds. That means we are looking at something at slightly a lower level. Unfortunately, all other Galaxy Buds had SM-R1xx model numbers, so we can’t tie the upcoming model with any of these with solid evidence.
Nonetheless, now that we have evidence of Samsung working on a new pair of Galaxy Buds, it shouldn’t be long before leaks reveal more information. Looking back at the launch dates of all previous models, the upcoming products should debut alongside the Galaxy S24 series in early 2024. Or maybe the company plans to launch it early, we shall find out soon.The post Samsung is readying anew pair of Galaxy Buds appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Metal Gear Solid collection won't skip PS4 after all

The Metal Gear Solid: Master Collection Vol. 1 is coming to PS5 and Xbox Series X|S on October 24, and it looks like it will actually be coming to PS4 as well. Initially a PS4 release wasn’t mentioned or suggested. But Konami yesterday has confirmed that it will indeed come to Sony’s older console.
In addition to PS5 and Xbox Series X|S, the game was also originally confirmed for Nintendo Switch and PC via Steam. The PS4 release, Konami says, is in response to fans asking for the Metal Gear Solid: Master Collection Vol. 1 to come to the platform. And Konami seems happy to oblige to make the fans happy.
The collection will contain the original trilogy of games which includes Metal Gear Solid, Metal Gear Solid 2: Sons of Liberty, and Metal Gear Solid 3: Snake Eater. The last of which has its own remake in the works for new-gen consoles. Although it’ll be under the name Metal Gear Solid Delta: Snake Eater.
The PS4 version of the Metal Gear Solid collection doesn’t have a release date
The game may be coming to the PS4 platform, but it’s unclear when. Konami doesn’t give a specific date for release of the PS4 version of the game collection. Just that it would be appeasing fans and making the release happen. That could mean it will arrive for PS4 on or around the same day as other platforms. But that seems unlikely otherwise Konami probably would have announced it.
When it does arrive, it’ll be available as a digital download version only like on Steam. Which is to be expected. Konami says in its tweet that players should “please wait for further details in the future” with regards to the PS4 release. And that seems like a good indication that it isn’t ready to share information on a launch date. Unfortunately that means those who haven’t upgraded to the PS5 yet will have to wait a little longer to revisit these classics. Unless they have the original console they launched on alongside copies of the games.

In response to the many requests we have received from fans worldwide, METAL GEAR SOLID: MASTER COLLECTION Vol.1 will also be available for the PlayStation®4 (download ver.)!
For details, please wait for further announcements in the future.#MetalGearSolid #MGSVol1 pic.twitter.com/195I0KBJRu
— METAL GEAR OFFICIAL (@Metalgear) August 21, 2023
The post Metal Gear Solid collection won’t skip PS4 after all appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

YouTube for desktop is sporting rounded corners

Rounded corners seem to make everything look better, it seems. This is what YouTube thinks, as people are starting to see rounded corners for their YouTube videos. This is part of a redesign that the company is going through right now. The company didn’t officially announce this, but a YouTube spokesperson Allison Toh confirmed this with The Verge.
YouTube for desktop is sporting rounded corners
This might be a pleasant surprise for people who often watch YouTube videos. Users are opening up videos to see that they’re housed in rounded squares. The radius of the corners isn’t all that extreme, but this change gives the videos a nice look. The corners won’t remain round when you enter theater mode, however.

The rounded corners on the videos match the corners on the thumbnails. This gives the interface an overall more consistent look and feel. If you don’t see this change, don’t worry; YouTube is still rolling out this change.
This change isn’t surprising
The fact that YouTube is rounding out the edges of its videos shouldn’t come as a shock. This is the direction that modern UIs are going. A good example is Google with Material You. In Android 11, there were some UI elements that were rounded, but they weren’t as extreme as what we got with Material You. Everything turned to rounded bubbles from buttons to menus. This is the aesthetic that Google is pushing to all of its products.
Another good example, though not as extreme, is Microsoft with Windows 11. In the latest version of Windows, many of the UI elements that had sharp corners are now rounded. It gives the interface a softer appearance.
So, it’s no shocker that YouTube is following this trend. The round aesthetic characterizes the modern user interface. In fact, YouTube is going to redesign the Skip Ads button. Instead of being a large rectangle, it’s going to be turned into a small pill-shaped button.The post YouTube for desktop is sporting rounded corners appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

COSCUP Unveiled

(Thanks to Paloma Oliveira for this contribution!)

Reflecting on how to improve our open communities

Navigating uncharted waters often leads to intriguing discoveries. Imagine immersing yourself in a realm that commemorates a quarter-century of Open Source accomplishment. Invited by Open Source Initiative (OSI) to reflect upon the 25 years of Open Source at COSCUP, a conference in Taiwan that focuses on coders, users and promoters of Open Source, I threw myself into these waters by proposing a review of history that is not unique around the globe, taking my perspective from South America and Europe to Asia, where I had never before ventured. 

You can read a full transcript of my talk here and check my critical take on the topic. After all, to review is to be able to identify where we failed and to be able to proceed from there.

More than offering something, I return with baggage full of new perspectives that made me renew my vision about the importance of Open Source in global and local contexts. COSCUP is a distinguished conference, drawing together Open Source enthusiasts mostly from around Asia: Japan, Malaysia, Indonesia, Singapore, Hong Kong and many others were heavily present. In this piece, we’ll embark on a thoughtful exploration of COSCUP’s defining characteristics, offering a nuanced perspective that distinguishes it in the bustling landscape of technology events.

So, what makes COSCUP a great conference?

From and to the communities

Spread across two days, the conference adopts a unique structure, with sessions categorized under different tracks, each managed by dedicated communities. This approach empowers participants to navigate subjects aligned with their interests, fostering connections with kindred spirits. The emphasis on community-led curation breathes fresh air into the conventional conference model. You can find the topics/ communities here  https://coscup.org/2023/en/topics.

Image from the author from the hallway signage informing of rooms and content curated by communities 

A melting pot of global and local voices

Navigating through COSCUP’s conference offerings went beyond language preferences in English or Chinese. In reality, it was a journey through a tapestry of diverse voices, akin to a symphony of polyphonies. This allowed for an intriguing blend of both global and local perspectives. 

While English has emerged as the dominant language in the technology landscape, serving as a common thread for communication, relying solely on English excludes those without fluency. This limitation bears various consequences; fluently expressing and understanding nuances in a language beyond one’s mother tongue is a privilege. Creating spaces for regional languages broadens participation and welcomes those who are still learning or aiming to navigate the intricate world of Open Source. This inclusion empowers individuals to express their thoughts across a broad spectrum, fostering the exploration of local solutions.

An illustration of the need for such inclusivity can be found in conversations with individuals like Naru from the SODA Foundation who asked us to consider the challenge of non-alphabetic writing systems. Naru highlighted the case of LibreOffice, which has a scarcity of developers fluent in logographic languages. This linguistic gap causes code disruptions, as changes from Europe and America often disregard alternative writing systems. How can this issue be tackled without understanding the unique requirements of such languages? This showcases the necessity for more developers who are versed in these languages to contribute actively and have a say in decisions. Hence, it becomes evident that influential conferences like COSCUP should maintain programs that encompass a broad spectrum, catering to both global connections and local preservation of diverse cultures.

In the conference schedule you can find communities from Hong Kong, a special Japan track and several talks about local dialect preservation, such as the talk: “How can we utilize Wikidata to protect Puyuma, an endangered language?”

Shining a spotlight on open design

Organized by Women Techmakers Taiwan and curated by catcatcatcat, this track directed attention to the intersection of development and design, a facet that often remains overlooked in the Open Source landscape. 

Unlike traditional tech conferences, where technical aspects often take precedence, the curated workshops and talks placed the spotlight on design’s pivotal role in enhancing usability. This spotlight reflects a broader understanding that technology should seamlessly align with users’ needs. The renewed focus on open design casts light on a pivotal aspect that influences the adoption and longevity of Open Source solutions.

While I’ve observed a growing trend of incorporating this topic into conferences like FOSS-Backstage and AllThingsOpen, it often remains on the periphery. However, at COSCUP, the dedicated room hosted a series of workshops and talks that delved beyond the technology driving creations. The emphasis extended to the synergy between developers and designers, with a paramount focus on the intrinsic purpose of technology – to serve users.

Historically, Open Source has leaned heavily towards lauding the technical aspects of its creations, an inclination that spawns a cascade of challenges. From an inclusion standpoint, this often hampers opportunities for contributions from diverse perspectives, particularly when these technologies directly influence various demographics.

Image taken from Eriol Fox & Abhishek Sharma workshop Becoming better contributors to social impact

From a sustainability perspective, technologies devoid of usability contribute to the generation of excessive waste. Although digital, the hidden mound of discarded components remains invisible. If we could visualize it, the space consumed by discarded hardware, the energy expended by servers, electrical consumption, data usage, and more would likely span vast expanses. Surprisingly, cloud storage – in existence for over a decade – has become more polluting than the aviation industry. Amidst the digital revolution’s accelerated production of software and the cost-effective proliferation of hardware and software, minimal thought has been spared for the unsustainability of this excessive production. Moreover, the repercussions of this surplus on the physical world remain woefully unaddressed.

From both a software and product perspective, technology devoid of usability and tangible user value fails to find traction within communities or markets. The pursuit of acceleration often overlooks a pivotal question: Why and for whom are we creating this technology? While development timelines might differ from research periods, harmony between these phases ensures the birth of superior and more sustainable creations.

In essence, the COSCUP conference didn’t just highlight open design’s significance, it underscored the imperative need to integrate user-centric perspectives into Open Source innovation. This paradigm shift extends beyond code, advocating for a holistic approach that recognizes the interplay of technology, design and its real-world implications.

Prioritizing well-being: nurturing mental health and balance

For a while now, both Europe and America have been awash with articles and talks addressing mental health issues, burnout and the impostor syndrome. A growing chorus stresses the urgency of spotlighting these challenges, emphasizing individual care and self-preservation. 

Conferences can often become grueling endeavors. The short timeframes that cram copious amounts of information, combined with the jet lag and the effort of navigating languages that aren’t always native, transform conference participation into a marathon. While undeniably exciting, it’s essential to recognize that conferences also constitute a form of work, especially in the context of Open Source, which largely resides within the professional sphere.

Seldom do conferences provide havens for respite, such as quiet rooms (which are rare), but other great conferences like PyCon PyData Berlin and KubeCon do offer the space. This initiative marked a commendable effort towards acknowledging the attendees’ well-being. However, COSCUP took this commitment a step further. By constraining conference hours from 8:50 AM to 5:00 PM, the organizers ensured that attendees’ time, mirroring regular working hours, remained within manageable limits. This pragmatic approach mitigated the risk of exhaustion, a common side effect of conferences.

In addition, conversations with Zoei, who boasts a background in psychology and is a key contributor to the well-being initiatives at COSCUP, provided valuable insights. She emphasized the transition from rhetoric to action. This commitment was tangibly manifested in the Healing Market, offering a range of amenities – from massage room to meditation sessions and even wine yoga – all designed to offer attendees much-needed moments of solace during the conference days.

Image from the author from the hallway signage informing about Healing Market offerings: yoga, meditation, board game and parents workshop Becoming better contributors to social impact

Notably, COSCUP extended its support to attendees who are parents, a demographic often left underserved in such environments. By dedicating specialized rooms, sessions and workshops to parents and children, COSCUP fostered an environment where developers and enthusiasts with children could participate fully without compromising on their family responsibilities.

Image from the author showing door signage for the parent-child workshop

Image from the author attending Wine Yoga session

In conclusion, COSCUP’s stance on well-being transcended the theoretical to embrace the practical, acknowledging the multifaceted nature of conference participation. The meticulous considerations for attendees’ mental and physical well-being reflect the conference’s commitment to holistic care, setting an example for other events to prioritize the welfare of their participants.

Beyond the conference halls: embracing cultural diversity

COSCUP invited participants to explore the rich tapestry of its host city beyond the conference walls. As a first-time traveler to Asia, I embarked on this journey with a mix of anticipation and trepidation. The value of in-person conferences became evident as I immersed myself in different cultures. Tangible experiences – from unfamiliar scents to novel flavors – offer a depth of engagement that virtual interactions can’t replicate. COSCUP’s encouragement to step beyond the digital realm aligns perfectly with the yearning for immersive experiences. International Exchanges Cross Community Gathering, Taipei City Tour, and several other community lead gatherings offered opportunities for meetings outside the conference walls, allowing participants to strengthen their interpersonal relationships.

Image from the author with other attendants from all around Asia during the international gathering night

Image from the author with COSCUP organizers at the end of the Taipei City Tour, which included a walk-in tour through the Old Town and a Chinese medicine experience in the Daily Health store

Image from the author with other COSCUP participants making medicinal tea at the Daily Health Chinese Medicine shop experience

Why attend conferences?

While digital interactions possess the potential for depth, the allure of in-person conferences holds a distinct magic. This allure magnifies when we immerse ourselves in diverse cultures. Even when we share common themes, the prism of reception and cultural context transforms how we comprehend and receive information. Sensory dimensions such as scents, tastes, textures and even ambient temperature intricately shape our attention and interpretation. The symphony of these sensations underpins why we travel; it’s an experience beyond the distraction-prone realm of simultaneous online engagement.

I seized the chance to integrate myself into the country’s fabric and cross the east coast of the island by bike. I gathered some useful information about it which you can read here.

The essence of conferences truly thrives in the hushed conversations, spontaneous exchanges, and the symphony of interaction beyond the spotlight. Sensory immersion plays a pivotal role—varied sights, sounds, scents and tastes provide a holistic understanding of the conference’s backdrop and its cultural nuances. These elements, often absent in virtual participation, infuse layers of depth into the learning process. The impact of international conference travel transcends the confines of the conference hall, offering a multifaceted experience that enriches both professional and personal growth. It serves as a catalyst for forging meaningful connections, fostering a broader comprehension of global perspectives, and embracing the transformative potency of diverse cultural viewpoints.


Beyond the conference sessions, COSCUP’s true essence lies in the connections forged, dialogues exchanged, and camaraderie nurtured within its corridors. It’s a collective journey that fuels personal evolution and transformation. The intricate tapestry of community engagement, well-being initiatives, and cultural immersion makes COSCUP an event that leaves an indelible mark.

As we contemplate the multifaceted nature of COSCUP, let’s acknowledge its distinctive blend of global perspectives, user-centric design and well-being advocacy. COSCUP transcends being just a tech event; it’s a platform that fosters connections, celebrates diversity, and sparks meaningful conversations that cross geographical boundaries. This is the true spirit of COSCUP – a narrative woven with threads of innovation, inclusivity and cross-cultural understanding.
The post <span class=’p-name’>COSCUP Unveiled</span> appeared first on Voices of Open Source.

Source: opensource.org

Samsung reveals Galaxy Tab S9 FE, Tab S9 FE+ colors & storage

Samsung‘s Galaxy Tab S9 FE series could launch soon. The new tablets have already picked up necessary regulatory approvals, while leaks have revealed their key specs. Now, the company has put up support pages for the devices on its official website. The pages confirm colors and storage options for both models.
Samsung launched three new flagship Android tablets last month: Galaxy Tab S9, Galaxy Tab S9+, and Galaxy Tab S9 Ultra. While it also had the Galaxy Tab S9 FE and Galaxy Tab S9 FE+ in the works, they didn’t arrive alongside the flagships. The company said nothing about the FE (Fan Edition) duo during the big launch event in late July.
However, the latter two tablets have been frequently surfacing on the internet over the past few weeks, hinting at a nearing launch. The biggest hint of them all has now come directly from Samsung. Hungarian publication GalaxyVilaga.hu recently spotted support pages for the Galaxy Tab S9 FE and Galaxy Tab S9 FE+ on the company’s official website in the country.
The Korean firm has published support pages for Wi-Fi and 5G versions of both models. As revealed by previous leaks and certification listings, the vanilla Galaxy Tab S9 FE has model numbers SM-X510 (Wi-Fi) and SM-X516B (5G). The model numbers for the Galaxy Tab S9 FE+ are SM-X610 and SM-X616B, respectively. All of these variants will be available in 8GB+128GB and 12GB+256GB memory and storage configurations.
The support pages also reveal that the Galaxy Tab S9 FE and Galaxy Tab S9 FE+ will be available in four color variants: Graphite/Grey, Lavender, Mint, and Silver. While this is all Samsung has officially confirmed about the new FE tablets, we do a lot more thanks to earlier leaks and certifications.
Galaxy Tab S9 FE series specifications
The Galaxy Tab S9 and Galaxy Tab S9 FE+ will be powered by Samsung’s Exynos 1380 processor. The former is the smaller of the two, featuring a 10.9-inch display. The latter has a 12.4-inch screen. It’s unclear whether the company will equip the tablets with an OLED display or LCD.
The new FE-series tablets are also expected to feature S Pen support, stereo speakers, and 45W fast charging. The Galaxy Tab S9 will only give you a single rear camera but the Galaxy Tab S9 FE+ has two cameras at the back. The devices should also boast Wi-Fi 6 and Samsung DeX support. They will debut with Android 13 onboard. Stay tuned for the official launch.The post Samsung reveals Galaxy Tab S9 FE, Tab S9 FE+ colors & storage appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Microsoft will sell Act-Blizz streaming rights to close deal

Microsoft has just laid its new proposed deal for acquiring Activision Blizzard to the CMA, and it involves unloading the streaming rights for Activision Blizzard games.
One of the initial holdouts for the CMA when it originally blocked the deal was Microsoft’s dominance in the cloud gaming space. And that by acquiring Activision Blizzard, it would lock popular franchises like Call of Duty, Diablo and others behind the Xbox Game Pass paywall. To appease the CMA, Microsoft has agreed to sell off the rights to stream Activision Blizzard games. This way it doesn’t control where the games are accessible and cannot limit them to its own platform.
The new deal, which the CMA still has to consider and approve, would see the streaming rights sold off to Ubisoft. Who would then put Activision Blizzard games on its Ubisoft+ service, which is accessible across multiple platforms, including PlayStation.
Ubisoft can license the Activision Blizzard streaming rights to Microsoft
Under this new deal, it would appear that everyone essentially wins. The CMA presumably would be happier with this contract than it was the last proposal. As it should loosen the grip on cloud gaming that Microsoft is perceived to have should the deal go through. But with Ubisoft having the rights to Activision and Blizzard’s games, it can then disperse them as it sees fit. While it would no doubt add those games to Ubisoft+ on consoles like PS5, Microsoft could still add them to Game Pass.
If Ubisoft chose to license those rights to Microsoft for Game Pass specifically. The terms of the new deal also state that Ubisoft would own the rights for 15 years after the deal closes. And in perpetuity. All of that said, the deal is not yet approved. The CMA will now look at the new deal and make its decision by October 18. Which is the new final date for approval. It will also be opening a new phase of investigation.

The Ubisoft+ lineup is expanding!
We’re excited to announce a new agreement that will bring Activision Blizzard games to Ubisoft+ via streaming upon the completion of Microsoft’s acquisition of Activision Blizzard!
We’ll also be licensing the games to a range of cloud streaming… pic.twitter.com/sZTnEFJedC
— Ubisoft (@Ubisoft) August 22, 2023
The post Microsoft will sell Act-Blizz streaming rights to close deal appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

The Xbox Wireless controller is on sale for as low as $44

The Xbox Core wireless controller is on sale right now for as low as $44. This is a pretty decent discount from its normal $60-$65 cost. The Xbox Core wireless controller is essentially the same wireless controller players have known since the beginning of the Xbox One days. The design is the same but it comes with some nice upgrades that debuted alongside the Xbox Series X.
Like the new share button for example. Currently you can pick up the controller at its deal price on Amazon for $44 in the Pulse Red, Robot White or Carbon Black colorways. The Pulse Red is the most eye catching of those three. But we’d venture to say the biggest attention grabber for us was the Deep Pink. This colorway is normally $65 and it’s down to $49 right now. While yes that’s more than the other three colorways mentioned above, $49 is the lowest price the Deep Pink controller has been in the last 30 days.
However, there are still even more colors on sale. The Electric Volt and Velocity Green are also down to just $49 from $65. Whether you just like collecting Xbox controllers and wanted to add to your collection, or you needed an additional controller for couch co-op games, now’s the time to get one of these colors and save money.
Why you should buy an Xbox Wireless controller
They’re just a great all-around controller for gaming. Comfortable to play with for hours, and versatile. As you can use them for Xbox One, Xbox Series X|S, PC, and even mobile. Plus, they take AA batteries as opposed to using an internal battery that you have to recharge. You can however get a recharge pack for them if you like this capability.
Another good reason to grab these is that Microsoft just made them easier to repair. And of course, the price.
Xbox Core Wireless ControllerThe post The Xbox Wireless controller is on sale for as low as $44 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

YouTube is tackling the issue with AI-generated music on the platform

Composers and musicians need to come to terms with the fact that AI-generated music exists, and so does YouTube. With the rise of AI “music”, the video-sharing platform has its hands full with how it’s going to handle the rising issues.
One main issue that YouTube has to deal with is the copyright aspect of AI-generated music. People are able to create content mostly or wholly using AI, and that sits in a huge gray area as the government is still trying to regulate AI music. This involves using AI-generated voices emulating popular artists. YouTube has a lot on its hands figuring out how to best handle this situation.
YouTube is partnering with music labels to address the issue with AI-generated music
In order to help musicians, composers, and other creators on the platform, YouTube is partnering with several people and entities in the music industry. According to a YouTube blog post (via The Verge), YouTube partnered with Universal Music Group (UMG). This is one of the largest music labels in the world. Along with this, the company assembled a team of musicians and artists such as OneRepublic, The estate of Frank Sinatra, Anitta, Juanes, Ryan Tedder, Darkchild, Max Richter, and more. This team will “help gather insights on generative AI experiments and research”.
This is essentially a group of authorities in the music industry to help YouTube best handle the situation. YouTube is also planning on making internal changes such as providing AI tools to help detect content that violates the rules, updating policies involving manipulated content, and working on its rights management system. Oddly enough, the company is planning on using generative AI tools to help determine if a piece of content was generated using AI.
This is something that we’ve heard before, “This company is still feeling its way around this new AI age.” It rings true for just about every tech company, and YouTube is no different. With the rise of AI “musicians”, the company has a problem. There are plenty of AI bros salivating over the money they could make ripping off of content that actual talented people made.
This is something that we all acknowledge as unfair. If this runs rampant (well, more rampant than it already is), then YouTube risks losing the trust of the users and creators that populate it today. So, it’s a good thing that YouTube is taking steps to address this issue.The post YouTube is tackling the issue with AI-generated music on the platform appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

T-Mobile will now let customers upgrade every year

T-Mobile is coming out with a new plan that lets customers upgrade their phone every year called Go5G Next. Prior to this new plan rollout, T-Mobile customers were “upgrade-ready” every two years using the Go5G Plus plans.
Customer’s can’t change to these new plans just yet but they won’t have to wait too long. T-Mobile confirms the Go5G Next plans will be available beginning this Thursday. Customers should be able to swap to these new plans over the phone or in-store. And it’s likely they’ll be able to change to them through the app as well. T-Mobile also confirms this isn’t a “limited-time thing.” Stating that the new plan will be sticking around. Meanwhile, the other Go5G plans will be sticking around as well.
With Go5G Next, T-Mobile customers can upgrade after paying off half their phone
The big benefit here is being able to upgrade to the latest device more often. Say you enjoy having he newest Samsung Galaxy S device or the newest iPhone. Now that’s much easier to do because this plan from T-Mobile is designed specifically to help customers move into the latest devices.
Anyone on a Go5G Next plan can do this if they pay off half of their current device first. Assuming they already have a device setup in EIP. According to T-Mobile, most customers have half of their device paid off in 12 months or less. So it made sense to let them upgrade at that time. That being said, T-Mobile isn’t making customers wait the full 12 months. It’s actually possible to upgrade every 6 months if half your phone is paid off by that time.
Though, we can’t imagine many people would want to change phones that frequently. Surely though, this will be perfect for people who always want the newest version of popular devices. Which typically come out every year. Go5G Next plans also come with everything the Go5G Plus plans come with. Which includes Apple TV+ and Netflix memberships, 50GB of mobile hotspot, and more.
The post T-Mobile will now let customers upgrade every year appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

ASUS ROG Phone 7 Series: Everything You Need To Know – August, 2023

The ASUS ROG Phone 7 and ROG Phone 7 Ultimate are official, with the company having announced the phones on April 13. I’ve spent the last couple of weeks or so using the ROG Phone 7 Ultimate as my daily driver, and if you’d like to see how that panned out you can read about it in my review here.
This is ASUS’s latest and greatest smartphone and it’s an absolutely insane powerhouse of a device. Built around mobile gaming just as all ROG Phones are, complete with the latest specs and features. This post is designed to leave nothing on the table, and tell you all there is to know about the ROG Phone 7 and ROG Phone 7 Ultimate.
Whether you’re considering buying one or not, you’ll know every important detail about this phone. Which might even help you decide if the device is right for you in the first place.
What is the ASUS ROG Phone 7?
It’s ASUS’s latest gaming smartphone. Packed with some of if not the most powerful hardware components of any phone on the market. It’s catered towards gamers, and the features reflect that.
How many models are there?
ASUS has made two models of the device this year. Not too unlike it did with the ROG Phone 6 series. Though it has changed things ever so slightly.
There’s the standard ROG Phone 7 and then the ROG Phone 7 Ultimate which is essentially the Pro model this year. But there’s not really much of a change in terms of specs. The only real difference is the back design. The ROG Phone 7 comes with an RGB ROG Eye logo and the ROG Phone 7 Ultimate replaces that with the ROG Vision display. The Ultimate model also replaces the small light bar that the regular model has with the AeroActive Portal.
There is a chance ASUS will come out with at least one additional model down the line. Officially the company has said it has nothing to share about that at this time. But if it follows last year’s path, we could see something like the ROG Phone 7D.
What are the specs of the ASUS ROG Phone 7?
Usually the specs are different, even if only slightly, on each of the models ASUS ends up launching. But this year, the specs are entirely the same. Right down to storage options. This wasn’t true just a couple generations ago. Where the ROG Phone 5 and ROG Phone 5 Pro had less storage and RAM than the ROG Phone 5 Ultimate.
Here’s what you can look forward to with the ROG Phone 7 and ROG Phone 7 Ultimate:
Platform (Processor): 3.2GHz Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Gen 2
GPU: Qualcomm Adreno 740
Storage: 512GB of UFS 4.0
OS & UI: Android 13 with ROG UI and Zen UI
Display: 6.78-inch 1080p (2440 x 1080) 165Hz AMOLED – HDR10+ certified, 720Hz touch sampling rate, 23ms touch latency, peak brightness of 1500 nits, 2.5D Corning Gorilla Glass Victus
IP Rating: IP54
Rear Camera: 50MP Sony IMX766 main sensor, 13MP Ultrawide sensor, 5MP macro sensor
Front Camera: 32MP OV32 Quad Bayer sensor
Back Cover: RGB ROG Eye Logo (ROG Phone 7) / ROG Vision Display (ROG Phone 7 Ultimate)
Speakers: 5-magnet Super Linear front-facing speakers tuned by Dirac
Battery: Dual 3,000mAh batteries for a total capacity of 6,000mAh
Charging: 65W
Colorways: Phantom Black and Storm White (ROG Phone 7) / Storm White (ROG Phone 7 Ultimate)
Dimensions: 173 x 77 x 10.3 mm
Weight: 239g
Does the phone have expandable storage?
The phone does not have expandable storage. And while that might seem like a bad thing to those that are used to having it on phones, it’s not really needed. Both models of the device have 512GB of UFS 4.0 storage. That’s a lot of storage and most people are going to struggle to fill all that. It’s not impossible to use up all that space, but it’s unlikely many users would run out of all that room.
So in the end, expandable storage would just make the phone cost more. And with 512GB at hand, plus all of the other specs that make the phone cost what it will, expandable storage becomes unnecessary.
When does the phone launch?
ASUS hasn’t confirmed a US or North America launch date yet. But it did confirm that it will be sometime in Q2. So you’re probably looking at sometime closer to Summer, perhaps in June or July.
What will the phone cost?
This will obviously depend on which model you go with. The ROG Phone 7 will start at $999. ASUS hasn’t confirmed US or North America pricing on the ROG Phone 7 Ultimate at this time. But with the $999 baseline price for the standard model, the Ultimate is probably going to be somewhere around the realm of $100 to $300 more. This is partially because of the ROG Vision display and the AeroActive Portal, and partially because it comes with the AeroActive Cooler 7 attachment.
This accessory is optional on the ROG Phone 7 and does not come in the box. Everything else about the two phone models is the same. All of that said, the ROG Phone 6 Pro from last year was $1,299. It’s possible ASUS could keep this price point for the ROG Phone 7 Ultimate this year.
Will the ASUS ROG Phone 7 work on all networks?
In the US it will work on AT&T and T-Mobile. This also means it will work with services like Google Fi. It will not work on Verizon. You’ll need to check the networks in your region to see if the phone is compatible. It’s also worth noting that you may need to do some tweaking to get it working on AT&T. This had to be done with the ROG Phone 6 Pro, which initially worked but then stopped working after a few months.
Are there any accessories for the device this year?

There are a few accessories, but there are technically less than what was available for last year’s models and previous years. There’s no new version of the ROG Kunai gamepad this year. At least not right now. You’ll get a slim shell case in the box with both phones.
And then there’s the AeroActive Cooler 7 as an optional accessory if you don’t have the Ultimate model, which it comes in the box with. Other optional accessories include a tempered glass screen protector and drop protection case from DevilCase which will fit both phones.
And that’s basically it. Keep in mind that if you want a controller, the ROG Kunai 3 will work with this new phone and function as it should. However, it does not quite fit properly since it wasn’t designed for this new phone. You could also use something like the Razer Kishi V2 which is our personal favorite mobile controller.
And as for headphones, there’s loads of options both new and old.
Does the ROG Phone 7 have a 3.5mm audio port?
It does have this port and it’s in the same spot as it’s been on every ROG Phone model over the years. The phone also still comes with the bottom and side-facing USB-C ports. And if you’re using the AeroActive Cooler 7, there’s a 3.5mm audio port on the bottom of that so you can plug your wired headphones into it instead of plugging them into the port on the phone itself. This way the cord for your headphones is facing downwards instead of coming out of the side of the phone while you’re holding it in landscape mode playing games.
Are the AirTriggers still present?

The AirTriggers are still there and honestly, these will likely never go anywhere. It’s been a signature feature of the ROG Phone since the beginning and they work so amazingly well now with all of the ways you can interact with them.
Don’t expect ASUS to ever cut these from the device feature list.
Has the camera improved?

Kind of? This is really a yes and no answer. The sensor for the main camera that ASUS is using in the ROG Phone 7 and ROG Phone 7 Ultimate is the same sensor that was used in the ROG Phone 6 series. But it does come with a few new features for pictures and video recording.
So while the hardware isn’t different, the new features can enhance the experience of using the camera, and the software feels like it’s improved. The photos might look better to you. That being said, the camera is still the same camera. So the experience will be pretty similar.
Overall the photos on the ROG Phone 7 series are just fine. The phone takes decent pictures and you aren’t really buying this phone for the camera quality anyway. ASUS knows this and continues to choose to focus on the gaming-centric features. If you end up buying one of these devices, just go into the purchase knowing that the camera won’t be as good as something like the Google Pixel or Samsung Galaxy flagships. And you’ll be a happy camper.
Is the cooling better than last year?

The cooling is definitely better and has noticeably improved. So much so that in my review I mention that I don’t think the AeroActive Cooler 7 is needed. You can comfortably game on the device for a few hours without the phone getting excessively warm. And this is mostly thanks to the improved vapor chamber compared to last year.
This is a big step up for gaming on the go and it means you can easily leave the AeroActive Cooler 7 at home if you just don’t want to pack it or if you don’t have room.
Although, there are still definite benefits to using the cooler attachment. For one, it drops the temps of your device by a significant amount. And that will help with performance by helping to prevent things like frame rate dips. It also has a built-in subwoofer for enhanced audio. While I wouldn’t call this a true subwoofer, it definitely improves the lows in the audio levels and the sound of your games is noticeably improved.
Plus it has a built-in kickstand if you want to play with a Bluetooth controller.The post ASUS ROG Phone 7 Series: Everything You Need To Know – August, 2023 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

WhatsApp HD photo sharing begins rolling out to users

WhatsApp has long been at the forefront of killing image quality, but the new HD photo feature is here to change things. This new feature was announced by Mark Zuckerberg via a recent Facebook post showing it in use. In the post, Mark also showed users how they could now step up the quality of photos they send to friends via WhatsApp.
This new feature is now coming to WhatsApp users globally via an app update. The update will bring a new button to the photo-sharing interface and with this button users can toggle between image quality. By default, photos shared with others via WhatsApp are sent using the platform’s standard quality.
Most images sent using this standard quality are messy and lose their original quality. With this new feature, WhatsApp will give users the ability to pick a different way to share images. This second photo-sharing option will retain its quality, hence ensuring that it gets to the receiver in good condition.
WhatsApp HD photo-sharing feature is here, and you can benefit from it as well
While this feature has been in the works for a while, it’s just making its way to end users. Some users in certain regions are already seeing this feature on their devices. Other users are yet to get this feature as it is rolling out region by region.
With this new feature, WhatsApp users will no longer worry about losing the quality of photos they share with others. By activating this feature before sharing a photo with another WhatsApp user, its quality will stay intact. Without the WhatsApp HD photo-sharing feature turned on, all pictures sent to others will lose their quality.
From Mark Zuckerberg’s announcement, how this feature can be put to use is highlighted. Users will be able to find this new feature in the image-sharing interface that pulls up before sending a photo to others. This is the interface from which users can edit photos before sending them to others.
The new WhatsApp HD photo-sharing feature sits on the top section of this interface. You will be able to find it between the ‘X’ and the crop/rotate button. Tapping on it will enable users to select to share the photo in HD quality, which will help retain its quality.
However, sharing photos using this new feature will mean they’d occupy more space and use up more data. Regardless of these facts, making use of the WhatsApp HD photo-sharing feature instead of the standard quality will be more beneficial to users. You will be able to access this new photo-sharing feature by updating your WhatsApp application via the Play Store or the App Store.The post WhatsApp HD photo sharing begins rolling out to users appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

NVIDIA dropped a whopping 22 games onto GeForce NOW this week

Moving Out 2 and loads of other games are being unleashed onto the cloud for GeForce NOW subscribers this week. In total NVIDIA added 22 games to the library of available titles you can stream.
Of those 22, 10 of them are day and date releases. Meaning they’re completely new games that just released this week. All of them between August 15 and August 18, and they can all be found on Steam. There’s also some Epic Games Store releases and a handful more Steam versions of games that were added, although they aren’t new releases like the others.
Still, some of them might be right up your alley. For starters, The Epic Games Store version of Darkest Dungeon II is now available on GeForce NOW. And if you use the Kovaak’s FPS Trainer on Steam, that’s available on GeForce NOW today too. Speaking of which, NVIDIA has also announced the first wave of winners for the Ultimate Kovaak’s Challenge. This is an ongoing challenge too, with more prizes to be had. If you participate, you’ll have the chance to win a 6-month Ultimate membership and a $100 Steam gift card.
And at the end of the challenge, those with the top three scores will win some truly cool stuff. 1st place will win an ASUS ROG Swift 240Hz monitor. 2nd place gets an ASUS Chromebook Vibe CX34 Flip. And 3rd place gets an ASUS ROG Azoth & ROG Gladius III Keyboard + Mouse Bundle.
Moving Out 2 and 21 other games land on GeForce NOW
Moving Out 2 is but one of many different games now streamable. And one of the 10 new day and date releases. Here’s everything you can now look forward to streaming via GeForce NOW from this week. Starting with the day and date releases, there’s Desynced, Hammerwatch II, The Cosmic Wheel SisterhoodBook of Hours, Gord, Shadow Gambit: The Cursed Crew, Wayfinder, Bomb Rush Cyberfunk, and The Texas Chainsaw Massacre.
Outside of the day and date releases, there’s big hits like Darkest Dungeon II and System Shock. As well as Amnesia: The Bunker, and F1 Manager 2023. Additionally you can now stream Age of Wonders 4, The Great War: Western Front, Inkbound, The Outlast Trials, Project Highrise, Regiments, and Symphony of War: The Nephilim Saga. You can also dive into the new 4.0 update for Genshin Impact.The post NVIDIA dropped a whopping 22 games onto GeForce NOW this week appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

YouTube Music song carousels get a Play All button

YouTube Music is getting a new feature for its carousels that allows you to “play all” songs that are in it. As reported by 9To5Google, a new play all button has popped up for carousels on the home screen. This only appears to be for carousels on the home screen though.
It’s not clear if this is available for every single user just yet. But it is stated that the play all button is rolling out to YouTube Music users on Android, iOS, and the web. Wherever you use it, you just might see the new button available. If you’re using the Android or iOS apps though and you don’t see it, you can try updating the app. It also might just be that it’s a server-side change and it has yet to hit your device.
That being said, this is supposed to be a pretty wide rollout. So most users should see the play all button available by now. Or by the end of the day likely.
YouTube Music play all button is available on multiple home screen carousels
The button won’t show up on every single carousel but it is there for quite a few of them. We found it on Trending Songs but 9To5Google reports it’s also on Quick Picks, Covers & Remixes, Heard in Shorts and others. It’s also popped up on Recommended Music Videos.
The reason this feature is useful is because it allows you to play every song in the carousel you might want to hear. If you don’t tap play all, what happens is YouTube Music will just create a radio station based on that song. Very likely playing music from the same artist. But if you like multiple songs in the carousel, now you can listen to them in succession. And simply skip the ones you don’t care for.
It’s a minor change. But one that definitely brings some quality of life. And one users appear to be happy about.

The post YouTube Music song carousels get a Play All button appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Amazon started testing a new star rating system, but it's already confusing

Amazon has reportedly started testing a new star rating system in specific regions. However, this new system is drawing criticism for being confusing. Critics argue that it makes it hard for buyers to see how a product ranks on the platform.
Android Police spotted the new star rating system in Amazon’s mobile app in India, the company’s website in Germany, and its global website when accessed from Germany. As you can see in the below image, Amazon now shows buyers an average star rating as a number. You can also find a singular gold star and a number that shows what percentage of ratings are five.

Amazon might have a new star rating system soon, but changes might be required
If the new star rating system is not activated in your region, you can still see Amazon products with five singular gold stars and the number of reviews each product has received. The current rating system is pretty straightforward, and it’s been on Amazon for many years. Buyers are also accustomed to it because of its simplicity and not causing confusion.
The problem with the new rating system is users can’t tell quickly if a product is rated well by other buyers. The only indicator is the percentage of five-star ratings, which might also be confusing for some users. Additionally, nefarious sellers might use the complexity of this new rating system to trick buyers into buying a product that’s not well-received by others.
The new system is being tested in some of Amazon’s greatest markets. This gives us more assurance that soon it will come to other regions, including the United States. In a statement to The Verge, Amazon Amazon spokesperson Maria Boschetti said, “We are always innovating on behalf of customers to provide the best possible shopping experience.”
Fake reviews and tricking potential buyers with illegitimate 5-star reviews have always been a problem for Amazon. The giant retailer reportedly plans to abandon its star rating and replace it with another system. The platform is also using generative AI to summarize user reviews.The post Amazon started testing a new star rating system, but it’s already confusing appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

The original Galaxy Z Fold is not dead yet, gets August update

Four years ago, Samsung shook the world with the first consumer foldable phone, the Galaxy Z Fold. It was a train wreck, but it helped lead the foldable phone to be the flashy tour de force that it is today. If you still own your original Galaxy Z fold (first off, you deserve a gold medal for protecting your phone), you’re getting the August 2023 security patch.
With four generations between now and the first Galaxy Fold, it feels like a lifetime has passed. The brand, and the foldable phone in general, has changed so much since then, but it doesn’t mean that Samsung has washed its hands of the product. People still rock the first-gen Fold, and they’re still enjoying software updates from the company.
The original Galaxy Z Fold is getting the August update
Samsung has been issuing updates really early in the month, but since the original Galaxy Fold is pretty old, it’s getting its update a bit later. The device no longer gets major platform upgrades, but it’s still getting security updates.
Right now, the update has landed in four markets: France (version F900FXXS7HWG1), Hong (version F900FXXS7HWG1) Kong, The UK (version F907BXXS7HWG1), and Korea (version F907NKOU3IWH1). Other markets will follow as time goes on.
So, there’s not much you can expect from this update. Since it’s a routine security patch, the phone got some fixes for system vulnerabilities. These will patch spots in your software that could give bad actors access to your system. The patch fixes several Samsung Galaxy-specific issues along with issues present within Android in general. There aren’t going to be any new features or changes to the system.
If you’re looking forward to this update, then you should go to your settings, find the Software Update section and tap on the Download and install button at the bottom of the screen. If you don’t see the update just yet, you’ll want to wait a few days for the update to make its way to you.The post The original Galaxy Z Fold is not dead yet, gets August update appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

10 top new articles created in July 2023 for ESXi, vCenter and more!

KB articles VMware

July has brought a fresh wave of VMware Knowledge Base (KB) articles. From optimizing cluster management to navigating vCenter upgrades, these articles offer a treasure trove of knowledge. Join us as we unpack the highlights of these KB articles and explore how they can shape and enhance your virtualization journey. 

The post 10 top new articles created in July 2023 for ESXi, vCenter and more! appeared first on VMware Support Insider.

Source: vmware

Ex-Google CEO Eric Schmidt launches AI startup

The former head of Google, Eric Schmidt, is now in charge of an AI startup that is focused on biotech and scientific research. Schmidt’s new company will be a non-profit.
Eric Schmidt has previously warned about the dangers of unregulated AI and how it can affect the 2024 election. He said AI could turn the upcoming US election into a “mess,” and its abuse can even put people’s lives in danger. The former tech executive now wants to dive deep into AI by launching an AI science company.
According to the people familiar with the case, Schmidt started to hire top scientists for his new organization. Two of the most prominent scientists who joined Schmidt’s startup are Samuel Rodriques, founder of the Applied Biotechnology Laboratory at the Francis Crick Institute, and Andrew White, a University of Rochester professor. Andrew White also specializes in the application of artificial intelligence in chemistry.
Former Google CEO Eric Schmidt starts an AI-science company
The name of Schmidt’s startup is yet to be discovered, but it’s said to be an OpenAI-like organization. OpenAI is the ChatGPT parent company and one of the leading companies in AI development. It also first started as a non-profit organization. However, it changed its strategies after launching ChatGPT and accepting an over $10 billion fund from Microsoft.
Schmidt will personally fund this new company, but he might also accept investments. He’s offering competitive salaries and resources to hire more top scientists. There are no further details about the goals and prospects of this company.
In an article for MIT Technology Review, Schmidt said, “With the advent of AI, science is about to become much more exciting — and in some ways unrecognizable.” The former Google CEO added, “The reverberations of this shift will be felt far outside the lab; they will affect us all.”
Eric Schmidt and his wife also support other AI-science projects. Including the non-profit AI2050 and the AI in Science Postdoctoral Fellowship Program.The post Ex-Google CEO Eric Schmidt launches AI startup appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Classic Modern Warfare 2 maps will be in Modern Warfare III

Activision today has confirmed what maps will be available in Modern Warfare III at launch. And it looks like rumors from the last few days were correct. Once Modern Warfare III launches later this year, it will include a bunch of classic maps from the original Modern Warfare 2 from 2009.
This includes favorites like Favela, Estate, Highrise, Terminal, and Rust among others. Basically, every one of the classic maps from the original version of Modern Warfare 2 will be available in Modern Warfare III at launch. Which is exactly what many players have been asking for. Not necessarily for them to come back in Modern Warfare III. But to be brought back in Modern Warfare II which is currently the playable game.
Of course, there might be some maps that are not listed which tie into the campaign. As is usually the case with all Call of Duty games. In addition to the new maps, Activision confirmed an upcoming new zombies mode.
Modern Warfare III will have 16 classic maps at launch
It’s still unclear if this is the entire list of maps for multiplayer at launch, but according to an official Call of Duty tweet, there will be 16 classic maps available right away. In addition to those named above, the Afghan, Derail, Karachi, Invasion, Quarry, Rundown, Scrapyard, Skidrow, Sub Base, Underpass, and Wasteland maps will be available at launch.
Launch will also include much larger maps. There will be three large-scale battle maps that should be for a mode similar to Modern Warfare II’s Ground War and Invasion modes. Activision also confirms one “colossal war map.”
Another huge change for multiplayer includes map voting. If you’ve played any of the Call of Duty games prior to Modern Warfare (2019), map voting was a beloved feature. But it was also one that served to keep lobbies full more often. One of the big issues with multiplayer in Modern Warfare II is the trash maps. Specifically because with no voting, you just get what you get. And if people aren’t happy with the map choice, a lot of times people leave. Which results in either exceedingly long times for filling the lobby with enough players, or a smaller lobby which fills after the match has started. Potentially with uneven teams.
In Modern Warfare III, players should be able to vote for one of at least two different map options, or a random map.

Iconic Maps at launch. Modern gameplay #MW3.
Sub Base
3⃣ Large-scale Battle Maps
1⃣ Colossal ‘War’ Map
— Call of Duty (@CallofDuty) August 17, 2023
The post Classic Modern Warfare 2 maps will be in Modern Warfare III appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Modern Warfare III will have an extraction survival zombies mode

Activision confirms that Modern Warfare III will have a zombies mode, but it’s not exactly like some might think. Official details about the new mode are part of Activision’s deluge of announcements for the game following the big reveal event today. This included an in-game mission called Shadow Siege, which led right into a cut-scene and the reveal trailer for Modern Warfare III once the mission was complete. Afterwards, the official Call of Duty X account began announcing features for the upcoming game.
One of those announcements was the new zombies mode. In past Call of Duty games that had zombies, all players were required to do was fight off waves of zombie enemies. Each wave was increasingly more difficult. But players also ended up with more cash to buy upgrades or new weapons. The zombies mode in Modern Warfare III takes things in a slightly different direction.
Modern Warfare III zombies is an extraction-based PvE experience
Essentially, Activision is mixing elements of zombies with Modern Warfare II’s DMZ mode. DMZ is the extraction-based mode that’s kind of like a blend of Warzone 2.0 and Escape from Tarkov. But it has both elements of PvE and PvP. In it, players can end up in numerous spawn points of a large open map. There are missions they can complete, bot enemies to fight, and even a number of real players. There’s also a timer and players will need to extract before that counts down to zero.
In the Modern Warfare III zombies mode, there’s no PvP. But it will be an open-world experience where players must survive zombie hordes and then extract for success. Activision confirms there will be missions to complete, and the whole thing is set in a Dark Aether Zombie story in the Modern Warfare universe. You will even be able to team up with other squads to outlast the zombie onslaught.
It’ll also feature “some of the biggest enemies in Call of Duty history.” And it sounds like it’ll be a pretty exciting experience for players. Modern Warfare III launches officially on November 10 for PC, PS5, PS4, Xbox Series X|S, and Xbox One.

Ready up for an open-world PvE extraction survival Zombies experience against some of the biggest enemies in Call of Duty history
A Dark Aether Zombies story set in the Modern Warfare universe.
Team up with other squads vs. massive hordes
Complete Missions. Survive.… pic.twitter.com/gsSvDaBbDM
— Call of Duty (@CallofDuty) August 17, 2023
The post Modern Warfare III will have an extraction survival zombies mode appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Google AI now summarizes entire articles for you

If you find yourself too overwhelmed at the prospect of having to read through a daunting web page, well, salvation is within reach. An experimental Google AI feature will be able to sum it up for you. It’s only been a few months since Google debuted its AI-powered search engine — called Search Generative Experience (SGE) — at Google I/O in May. Already, the company has been making several upgrades to SGE. The latest update now apparently includes a feature that will summarize articles on the web for you.
Google has updated its AI-powered search engine to summarize web articles.
The tech giant already uses SGE to answer search queries and summarize search results, which bypasses the need for users to dig through flurries of search results. But now, according to a blog post from the company, Google is taking SGE further with a new feature that will give users a bullet-point summary of any lengthy web article (via The Verge).
“Our aim is to test how generative AI can help you navigate information online and get to the core of what you’re looking for even faster,” Google said in the statement. 
The company is rolling out the feature to Google Chrome users on Android and iOS devices first. After that, it will reach desktop users.
Google explains that the feature is specifically designed for long-form content. When you’re scrolling on a web page, an option called “Get AI-powered key points” will appear. Clicking this will truncate the article into a summary of its content. 
“We think these capabilities can be particularly helpful when you’re learning something new or complex, but they can also come in handy for other tasks like finding a new recipe or researching a big purchase,” Google said.
Image Credit: Google
Notably, the feature could face resistance from website publishers who want to keep readers on their websites. This is why the SGE while browsing function will only work “on articles that are freely available to the public on the web,” according to the company. Consequently, it will not work for content behind a paywall.
Users who have already opted into SGE automatically have access to the function. Otherwise, you can try it as a standalone function on Google’s Search Labs. The post Google AI now summarizes entire articles for you appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

This small change could make Google Maps a little less intuitive

The trick to making a great app is to make it usable. Intuitive navigation can add a lot to the user experience, and Google Maps has this. However, according to 9To5Google (via Android Police), a new swipe gesture in Google Maps will make it just a bit less intuitive.
If you wanted to use Google Maps without the search bar and other UI elements, you’d only need to tap on the screen. This would give you a clean interface to look through. If you wanted to place a pin, you’d just need to tap and hold on an empty spot on the map. That’s how it’s been for years, but Google is making a small tweak that might inconvenience some people.
Google brings a new swipe gesture for Google Maps
The company has been testing this new change out since February, and people are starting to see it. When you’re using Google Maps, instead of tapping on the screen, you’ll need to swipe up on the search bar to clear out the UI. That’s not the hardest gesture to perform, but it brings unnecessary hand gymnastics into the equation. It involves you reaching up to the top of the screen to perform this.
Now, if you tap on the screen, the app will drop a pin. So, people will open the app and start dropping pins thinking that they’re going to clear the interface. However, Google does show a little notification telling you about the new gesture.
It’s weird that Google chose to do this. There didn’t seem to be a problem with the old method. You were able to clear the screen and drop pins without changing your grip on the phone. This won’t particularly break the Google Maps experience, it will be a bit of an inconvenience.
In any case, if you don’t see this change, Google is still rolling it out. It should reach your device soon.The post This small change could make Google Maps a little less intuitive appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Best Bluetooth headphones you can buy – August 2023

We know that the headphone jack is pretty much extinct in phones, and you’ve most likely moved on to the Bluetooth headphones life. There are a ton of compelling offers out there from so many different sources, so you definitely know that you have your pick. However, what are the best Bluetooth headphones out there?
This is what we are setting out to answer! We have a list of some of the best Bluetooth headphones that you can get your hands on. These will include budget-friendly options along with more lavish and premium options. If you’re looking for more affordable headphones, you can check out our Best Headphones/Earbuds Under $100.

Price: $99.99
Buy: Amazon
Most people in the audio industry are familiar with Raycon, it’s a really big consumer brand that offers some great value for its products. The EVERYDAY HEADPHONES, as the name implies, are headphones for your everyday life. They’re capable of producing Hi-Fi audio, so they also create a high-quality listening experience.
These headphones have a set of powerful 40mm drivers delivering a full and immersive sound. If you’re into headphones that have powerful bass, then these will be right for you. They’re not only powerful, but they produce a well-balanced sound.
These headphones have six microphones that they use for top-notch active noise cancellation. Also, you’re guaranteed to have up to 38 hours of battery life on a single charge. These create an all-around great experience for the cost.
House of Marley Positive Vibration XL

Price: $110.97
Buy: Amazon
This might not be as well-known of a company as Bose or Sony, but House of Marley pumps out some amazing headphones. The Positive Vibration XL are a set of premium headphones with a classy and sleek design. The cups have a matte black texture with the wooden logo inlaid.
These don’t only look good. The Positive Vibration XL come with a set of powerful 40mm drivers to deliver a powerful and high-definition sound. Not only can they deliver some deep and warm bass, but they also achieve a crystal-clear sound overall.
You don’t have to worry about battery life with the headphones. These are rated to give you a full 24 hours of playback time on a single charge. This is more than enough for work or a long trip. These are a great pair to look into if you’re looking for something new.
House of Marley Positive Vibration XL – Amazon
JBL – Tune 510BT

Price: $149.99
Buy: Best Buy
If affordability is the priority, then you’ll want to look at these headphones. JBL is a master of making affordable audio products that are also high-quality. The JBL – Tune 510BT give you some good bang for your buck with its set of powerful drivers. They give you a respectably high-quality sound with some good bass. It can make more modern music sound great.
If you have to take these headphones on a long trip or to work with you, then battery life won’t be an issue. You’ll just need to charge them up and you’re good for up to 40 hours of playback. With the comfortable ear cups, you won’t have any issues having them on that long.
JBL – Tune 510BT – Best Buy
Bose – Headphones 700

Price: $379
Buy: Best Buy
Bose is a big name in the audio space, and the 700 series headphones do well to live up to the brand’s name. These headphones come in either silver or black, and they both look amazing. What’s also neat about them is that you can use these headphones to summon digital assistants like Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant, and Siri.
With a 20-hour battery life, you will be able to use these headphones to get you through the day. Also, they come with very large and comfortable ear cups so that you can listen to them for extended periods of time without getting tired. These are definitely for people who want to take their audio game to the next level.
Bose – Headphones 700 – Best Buy
Beats Solo3

Price: $199.95
Buy: Amazon
Everyone pretty much knows about the Beats brand of speakers and headphones, and here’s a pair of affordable cans from the company. The Beats Solo3 bring some of the best features to a price that’s not hard to swallow. There’s a lot to love about these headphones from their design to their audio quality. They achieve their superior audio quality from the Apple W1 headphone chip. While it uses an Apple chip, they’re still compatible with Android devices.
These headphones don’t only offer superior sound, but they also offer great battery life. On a single charge, you can get up to 40 hours of listening. That’s great for long trips and work days. If you run out of charge, you can get 3 hours of playback on a 5-minute charge.
Beats Solo3 – Amazon
Sennheiser HD 560S

Price: $229
Buy: Amazon
No list of the best headphones will be complete without an entry from Sennheiser. While the company is known for making rather lavish and expensive products, those more price-conscious would like to check out the HD 560S. While these are more affordable, they still give you a high-quality audio experience.
These headphones come with a set of high-quality Sennheiser drivers that give you a flawless high-fidelity sound. They’re meant for people in a more professional field, as they are open-back headphones. Since they’re open back, they give you a much more open sound. So, if you are recording in the studio or just relaxing at home, these will be superb to try out. They’re great for use with Bluetooth, however, there’s also the option to use a 3.5mm aux cord.
Sennheiser HD 560S
Edifier STAX Spirit S3

Price: $399.99
Buy: Amazon
If you’re looking for a more premium pair of Edifier headphones, then you may want to look into the Edifier STAX S3. These are for people who are very serious about their music. They come with a very powerful set of high-quality drivers, and they’re capable of producing 24-bit/96kHz lossless audio. Not only that, but these headphones leverage the powerful Snapdragon sound technology. They can produce a wide range of frequencies from 10Hz to 40kHz.
Using the built-in EQ in the Edifier Connect app, you’re able to tune the audio specifically to your liking. Also, they have Edifier’s top-tier noise-cancellation technology. You would love to listen to these for an extended amount of time because of the audio quality. Also, you have an 80-hour battery life on a single charge. Just a 10-minute charge can get you up to 11 hours of playback Time.
Edifier STAX Spirit S3
Price: $499.99
Buy: Sony
These headphones are for people who really want an audiophile experience. The sleek Sony WH1000XM4 headphones have a beautiful design with accented microphones. They’re also made from high-quality materials, as you can expect from Sony products.
They offer great audio quality and they’re compatible with the LDAC audio codec. These headphones can play audio with a 96kHz sampling rate, so you’ll be able to listen to high-quality audio with these headphones. They have an impressive 30 hours of battery with the noise cancellation on and 38 hours with it off. That’s great if you are planning on using these for a full day of work. These are a great pair of headphones to have if you are a Sony fan and an audiophile.
Sony WH-1000XM4 – SonyThe post Best Bluetooth headphones you can buy – August 2023 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Prime Gaming and Riot are giving away tons of stuff

Prime Gaming is great for getting loads of free in-game content and even some full games, but now it’s having a giveaway for actual tangible loot in partnership with Riot. As part of the VALORANT Champions 2023 tournament, Prime Gaming and Riot are holding a giveaway that includes quite a few prizes. The grand prize of course will have the best stuff. But even if you don’t win the grand prize there are still other things you could end up with.
Giveaways are going to be daily too. With each day having something different to win. Today for example, is the first chance to win. And the prizes include two tickets to the VALORANT Champs Finals event, one Tactibear plush, a VALORANT Clutch beanie, the HyperX Pulsefire Haste 2 mouse, and the HyperX Pulsefire Mat in the 2XL size.
If you’re interested in entering the contest, you can do so through the official giveaway site. But you only have about 23 hours left at the time of writing to enter for today’s prizes. Then new stuff will be given away tomorrow.
The Prime Gaming Riot giveaway grand prize includes a chair and a monitor
We’ve got some thoughts on gaming chairs. But if you want to try your hand at winning one instead of buying one, enter for the grand prize in Prime Gaming and Riot’s contest. Because one of the items in the grand prize is a VALORANT Secret Labs chair. The grand prize also includes a 240Hz gaming monitor, a Pheonix statue, the Pulsefire Haste 2 mouse, a Sony Inzone H9 wireless gaming headset and loads more. You can see the full set of items in the grand prize below.
The grand prize giveaway also has two runner up winners. You can enter each of the daily contests as well as the grand prize one, too. Winners for the grand prize are picked on August 26. So you’ve just under 11 days left to enter that one. The giveaways are also limited to certain regions. This includes the US, Canada, UK, France, Italy, Australia, Brazil, Spain, Netherlands, Sweden, Austria, Portugal, Poland, and Germany.
The post Prime Gaming and Riot are giving away tons of stuff appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

The OnePlus Open could come as early as September

We’re waiting on OnePlus to bring us its first foldable. Called the OnePlus Open, this is set to be a powerful device, but it was delayed for a bit. Now, according to Yogesh Brar (via Techradar), it seems that the OnePlus Open could come as early as September.
The OnePlus Open was delayed recently, and it wasn’t because of technical issues. OnePlus’ sister company Oppo had some patent issues with Nokia in Germany. That’s a bummer because, without the delay, it was going to launch in just under two weeks. Now, we don’t know when to expect the phone to come out.
The OnePlus Open might launch as soon as September
When we first heard about the delay, we got wind that it would happen sometime in October. We didn’t get an exact date, and that shows that things are still up in the air with this delay. While Oppo and OnePlus are two entities, they’re both owned by the same company, and they’ve technically merged. So, what happens to Oppo happens to OnePlus.
Right now, we’re in the dark as to when we’ll see the official launch. Brar made a Twitter post about when Oppo and OnePlus are going to launch their devices. It said that the Oppo Find N3 Flip should come at the end of August when the OnePlus Open was supposed to come.

OPPO Find N3 Flip China launch is scheduled for end of August.
OnePlus Open Global launch is expected to happen by late September – early October.
Apparently the delay is not just due to display switch but also due to the Nokia – OPPO royalty case.
— Yogesh Brar (@heyitsyogesh) August 16, 2023

As for the OnePlus Open, the post said that this phone should come out in either late September or early October. This puts it either right after the launch of the iPhone 15 or right before the launch of the Pixel 8. While the OnePlus Open isn’t really trying to appeal to the same markets as those phones, it will still be overshadowed by those devices news-wise. Hopefully, that doesn’t have a negative effect on the excitement for this device. Only time will tell if we’ll get this phone sooner or later.The post The OnePlus Open could come as early as September appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

10 new KB articles created in July 2023 for Workspace ONE, Horizon View, and more! 

KB articles VMware

In this blog post, we present an overview of the most recent VMware Knowledge Base (KB) articles released in July. These articles cover a diverse range of topics and products, offering valuable insights and solutions for VMware users. From vTPM-enabled Instant Clone desktop pools encountering AppVolumes issues to troubleshooting challenges with WS1 Web for iOS crashes, Mobile Threat Defense notifications, Trusted Network Detection setup on Windows 10, App Volume writables, VPP application records syncing errors, Horizon connection server challenges, and Workspace ONE Content limitations, we’ve got you covered. Gain a deeper understanding of these issues, their causes, resolutions, and workarounds, and stay informed about the latest developments in the VMware ecosystem.

The post 10 new KB articles created in July 2023 for Workspace ONE, Horizon View, and more!  appeared first on VMware Support Insider.

Source: vmware

You can start preloading Starfield tomorrow

Starfield is a mere 19 days away now (16 days if you have early access), but preloads actually start this week. Officially, Starfield preloads will begin on August 17 for those on PC via Windows and on Xbox Series X|S. This includes if you will be accessing the game via Game Pass on PC or console. If you’re accessing the game through the PC Xbox app, you can begin the preload process now by hitting the “pre-install” button. Keep in mind though, that this doesn’t install all of the game’s files. So the full preload will still be tomorrow.
Starfield will also be available through Steam, though you can’t preload it until August 30 if this is where you pre-ordered it. That’s only a couple of days before the early access starts for those who pre-ordered the premium edition. And if that happens to be you, you’re definitely going to want to preload the game as soon as you can if you want to play the moment the game goes live.
Starfield preloads will require nearly 140GB of free space
As mentioned earlier you can start the preload process right now, but this doesn’t do a full installation of the game. That will begin on August 17 and August 30. When you hit the pre-installation button though to get things rolling, you can see how much disk space the game will take up on PC. Turns out, nearly 140GB. 139.84GB to be exact.
That shouldn’t be surprising with how much the game will have included. Over 1,000 planets to explore (not all of them with life mind you), tons of quests, tons of weapons, and much more.  So, close to 140GB sounds about right. It’s unclear if the Xbox version will take up the same amount of space. But chances are it won’t need quite that much. Generally speaking, console versions of games tend to be smaller. Modern Warfare II for example needed less room on PS5 then it did via Steam on PC. Still, expect it to take up plenty of room regardless.

Prepare for launch.#Starfield has gone gold! Preloads begin tomorrow for @Xbox X|S and Windows PC and August 30 for Steam. pic.twitter.com/LC8xJnI8WN
— Bethesda Game Studios (@BethesdaStudios) August 16, 2023
The post You can start preloading Starfield tomorrow appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Google Pixel has the third-largest Android brand in North America

According to recent statistics, Google Pixel is now the third-largest Android brand in North America. At the moment, in this region, Google Pixel accounts for 2.46% of Android smartphones out in the wild. This means that more and more people are gaining interest in the brand and purchasing some of its products.
Fans in this region are proud of this growth, and so is Google, the owner and manufacturer of the Pixel brand. The brand has gained these numbers from Android users that were previously into Samsung or Motorola devices. Additionally, part of this number is Apple users that have switched over to the Android side in the North American region.
While 2.46% of all devices in North America sounds small, it is a great growth for Google Pixel. Over the past years, the brand has appealed to netizens as a phone for core Android fans and enthusiasts looking out for the best software experience. But all of that is changing and people are now benefiting from the ton of features that Google has been packing in their Pixel devices over the past few years.
Google Pixel is crushing its game in North America as it gains more users
Over the years, the Google Pixel brand has rolled out a good number of smartphones. Some of these entries only appealed to enthusiasts that wanted that pure stock Android software feel. This is because Google is the company that owns Android, therefore it’s only right that they offer the best software experience on their devices.
One device release after another, Google proved to the crowd that they offer the purest Android feel on a device. But users didn’t just want the purest Android feel, they wanted more than that. They wanted performance, great camera technology, sleek design, a better ecosystem of devices, and so much more.
Google knew that they were up to the task and got all hands-on deck to give users what they wanted. The Pixel 4 series marked a revolution for the Pixel smartphone line-up. Moving on from the Pixel 4 series, Google kept nailing it, one device launch after another, from the 5 series to the 7 series.
With the 6 series, Google brought its own processor (Tensor) to the smartphone market. This gave the Pixel 6 series better camera technology and also helped refine the performance as well as the software experience. The Pixel 7 series hit the launch stage with a new and refreshed Tensor processor, improving upon the previous processor on the 6 series.
Google’s improvements over the years have earned it a place as the fourth-largest smartphone brand in North America. Additionally, the brand is also the second-largest in Japan and the fourth-largest in Australia. With the launch of the coming Pine 8 series, Google will continue growing the Pixel brand one step at a time.The post Google Pixel has the third-largest Android brand in North America appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Grab this 2TB PS5 SSD with a heatsink for under $90

These days you have more than quite a few options for SSD storage expansion for your PS5, like this M.2 NVMe SSD from Silicon Power. It’s currently available at a deal price right now over on Amazon for under $90 when it normally costs about $100.
The official pricing usually sits at around $98.97. But Amazon is listing it on sale for $85.97. Saving you 13%. The better part about this deal is that this is a 2TB drive and it comes with a pre-installed heatsink. So all you have to do is pop it into your PS5’s SSD expansion slot, format it, and you’re good to go. It goes without saying that the SSD drive you pick for your PS5 console needs to be compatible with it. If you’re looking for additional options, you can check out our list for the best SSDs for PS5.
Why you should buy the Silicon Power 2TB XS70 SSD
The main reasons are the price and the compatibility. To be more specific, many of the other PS5 SSD options we’ve recommended aren’t this inexpensive. So this makes it a good value because of the space, and because it already comes with a heatsink. Which Sony recommends you have.
The other main reason is because it’s a compatible SSD that meets Sony’s requirements. Silicon Power also makes pretty good stuff. That being said, 2TB isn’t necessarily enough space for everyone. Maybe you play a lot of games on your PS5 and you want every single one of them installed. In that case, Silicon Power’s 4TB SSD with a heatsink is also on sale. It normally costs around $217.97. However, Amazon has it for $196.97 right now. For 4TB of storage, that’s a really good price. Especially when you compare that to other 4TB options. If you want to snag the deals on the 2TB drive or 4TB drive, and you should, you can grab them at the button below.
Silicon Power 2TB XS70 PS5 M.2 NVMe SSDThe post Grab this 2TB PS5 SSD with a heatsink for under $90 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

New Xbox strike system aims to improve community safety

Xbox today is announcing a new enforcement strike system that is designed to (hopefully) improve community engagement. The policy is meant to ensure more safety for all players online. And to that end each time a player receives an enforcement for something they did or said, they get a strike. Each strike will suspend players from Xbox social features including chat, party chat, multiplayer and more. Each strike also lasts for varying lengths of time. Culminating in a year-long suspension if they reach eight strikes.
Although, a user getting eight strikes seems highly unlikely. As CVP of Xbox Players Services Dave McCarthy states that fewer than 1% of all players on the platform received a temporary suspension. And only one third of those players got a second one. Which means most players aren’t intentionally engaging in harmful of toxic practices that lessen the experience less safe for others. And those that do tend to stop that activity after the first strike.
The Xbox strike system is designed to protect all players
This new system is about protecting all players, McCarthy says. Which is why at first, players who get an enforcement with an accompanying strike aren’t locked out from single player content. They also won’t lose access to the content they purchased. As suspensions only include social experiences.
That being said, it is possible for players to completely lose access to the account, including purchased content, if the violations are serious enough. Naturally, players that receive an enforcement might wonder what got them in that situation. The new system allows players to have a view of their enforcement history with attached descriptions of their actions that led to suspensions.
It’s also possible for players to get multiple strikes in one enforcement. The new history view neatly lays out how many strikes certain actions are worth. For example, profanity is worth 1+ strikes while hate speech is worth 3+ strikes. Strikes can also be removed if a user wins appeals so a suspension. All-in-all, the new system should allow for a cleaner, more detailed view of bans for players on the wrong side of them. And make for a safer play space for everyone.

The post New Xbox strike system aims to improve community safety appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Galaxy S21 FE, A53 5G & A52 5G get August update in the US

Samsung is rolling out the August 2023 Android security patch to a few more Galaxy devices in the US. The Galaxy S21 FE, Galaxy A53 5G, and Galaxy A52 5G are all receiving the latest security update stateside. The new SMR (Security Maintenance Release) has already reached dozens of other Galaxy smartphones.
As of this writing, Samsung is pushing the August SMR to carrier-locked variants of the Galaxy S21 FE in the US. The update is live for users on T-Mobile, Metro, and Dish networks with the firmware build number G990USQS8EWG3. The official changelog confirms that the device isn’t getting anything more than this month’s security fixes.
These security fixes will soon reach unlocked Galaxy S21 FE units in the US. Meanwhile, Samsung is rolling out the same update in Europe with the build number G990BXXS6EWG9. Users in other parts of the world, such as Asia, Africa, and Latin America, can also expect to receive the August SMR in the coming days.
Galaxy A53 5G and A52 5G also get Samsung’s August update in the US
Along with the Galaxy S21 FE, Samsung is also rolling out the August update to Galaxy A53 5G and Galaxy A52 5G in the US. Once again, the update is limited to carrier-locked units. The new build numbers for the duo are A536USQS7CWH1 and A526USQSAEWG9, respectively. Samsung’s official changelog reveals that the update doesn’t bring anything apart from the latest security patches.
While the Galaxy A53 5G and Galaxy A52 5G aren’t getting the August SMR anywhere else, the rollout is live for the 4G/LTE version of the latter in Asia and Europe. The update comes with firmware version A525FXXS6DWG2 and shares the changelog with the 5G version. Note that the Galaxy A53 wasn’t sold in a 4G flavor, while the 4G version of the Galaxy A52 never arrived in the US.
While the Galaxy S21 FE, Galaxy A53 5G, Galaxy A52 5G, and Galaxy A52 may not be getting any new features or improvements with the August update, the latest SMR contains plenty of vulnerability fixes. To be specific, it patches 86 vulnerabilities across the Galaxy family. At least three of those were critical security flaws, Google and Samsung confirmed earlier this month.
If you’re using any of these Samsung smartphones and have yet to receive the August update, you should soon. Watch out for a notification prompting you to download the OTA (over-the-air) update. You can also manually check for new updates from the Settings app on your phone.The post Galaxy S21 FE, A53 5G & A52 5G get August update in the US appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5 Tips & Tricks

Samsung’s newest foldable – the Galaxy Z Fold 5 – is finally here, and it’s time to go over some tips and tricks for the new foldable. So that you can get the most out of your newest device. Some of this tips and tricks you might already know, while others you may not.
Get an S Pen

To really take full advantage of your new Galaxy Z Fold 5, it’s a good idea to get a S Pen. Now while you can use the S Pen Fold Edition, it’s smarter to get the new Slim S Pen Case. That’s because you’re going to have a case to house the S Pen. It’s also just $99 which includes the S Pen. And normally that S Pen costs around $70 or more. So it’s a pretty good value.
Slim S Pen Case – Samsung
Grab a good case

We have already done a round up on the best cases for the Galaxy Z Fold 5, but our number one option is the Eco-Leather Case. This is a really good looking case for the Galaxy Z Fold 5, and comes in both phantom black and icy blue colors. So it can match your Galaxy Z Fold 5, depending on the color you picked up. This case is about $80, but if you want something a bit cheaper, check out our round up here.
Eco-Leather Case – Samsung
Use the Flex Panel

A pretty cool feature that is located in Labs (Settings > Advanced Features > Labs) is the Flex Mode Panel. Essentially, this allows to have the Flex Mode Panel in any app.
So when you open the Galaxy Z Fold 5 and have it at a 90-degree angle, you’ll get a control panel on the bottom half with the actual app on the other side. Basically, the bottom half of the phone will give you a trackpad, with a few other shortcuts on the left-hand side. Making it easier to navigate through your Galaxy Z Fold 5.
Using the taskbar makes life easier

Surprisingly, this is a feature that Google actually added to foldables with the Android 12L update. It’s a taskbar that’s similar to what you’d see on a laptop or desktop. At the bottom of the screen, you’ll see the apps from your dock there, along with four of the most recently opened apps. And on the far left side, there’s a button for the app drawer. This allows you to quickly switch between apps. And even drag-and-drop apps into multi-window and pop-up view.
This is close to what you’d see with DeX enabled, but not quite.
Get used to using multi-window and pop-up view

Two features that Samsung has really leaned on with its foldables are: multi-window and pop-up view. Of course, multi-window is not new. This is something Samsung has had since the early Galaxy Note days. But it has continued to get better over the years, especially with foldables.
You can drag and drop apps onto the left, right, bottom or top of the display and use two apps at the same time. Samsung does allow you to use up to three at a time.
Another feature is pop-up view. Which is exactly what it sounds like. It’s basically like having a window open in a desktop device like your computer. You can drag and resize it as well. This is really good since a lot of apps don’t work all that well on the Galaxy Z Fold 5, since many are being forced to stretch to fill the whole screen. Keep in mind that this screen is almost a square, and not a rectangle like most phones.
Never use the front-facing camera again
While we will be doing a separate article on tips and tricks for the Galaxy Z Fold 5 camera system, this is a pretty good tip to include here. With the Galaxy Z Fold 5 having that front-facing or outer display, there’s really no reason to use that front-facing camera on either display. Instead, use the back cameras.
Open your Galaxy Z Fold 5, and then tap the button on the upper right corner. It will look like a square with one side being filled in. This is going to put the view finder on the front display. So you can take a selfie with the rear cameras, and still see yourself to frame the picture correctly.
Use different home screens for each display

Did you know that you can keep both home screens the same, or set up different layouts for each display? Well, you can on the Galaxy Z Fold 5 – you can’t on the Pixel Fold, interestingly. Head into Settings > Home Screen > Cover Screen Mirroring.
By turning off Cover Screen Mirroring, you can set up two entirely different home screen layouts on your Galaxy Z Fold 5. Or if you prefer them to be mirrored, you can leave it on. Just remember that the main display will hold fewer icons this way, so it can mirror properly.
Download Gboard and ditch Samsung’s Keyboard
You should always download Gboard if it is not the default keyboard, but especially on a foldable. Google has done a good job at making its keyboard work really well on larger displays like foldables and tablets. That includes having the split keyboard, making it easier to type on this larger display. Gboard also offers all sorts of other great features, like the ability to theme with your wallpaper.
Get experienced with Good Lock

Good Lock is a must-download app for any Samsung device. And with a foldable, there’s so many more features available with Good Lock. Basically, Good Lock is a customization app that has a bunch of other apps that plug into it. And can essentially change every part of the phone. From the look and feel, to even changing some of the settings. This includes forcing apps to go from the main display to the cover screen (by default it does it the other way around only). Or filling in the under-display camera with black pixels, so it stands out a bit more.
These are really just the beginning of what Good Lock can do.The post Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5 Tips & Tricks appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Rumor suggests GTA VI has been in development since 2015

GTA VI may have been in development since at least 2015, according to a rumor posted on the Gaming Leaks and Rumors subreddit. The Reddit post (spotted by Gamerant), references the work experience of video producer Jon Young on Linkedin. Young, which worked directly for Rockstar from 2005 to 2018 according to his Linkedin profile, worked on numerous titles for the studio over the years. This apparently included development on GTA VI from 2015 to 2018, where Young worked as the lead Video Editor in Rockstar’s Research department.
If this timing is accurate, then Rockstar has been developing the sixth mainline title in the GTA series since just two years after the release of GTA V. Which came out in September of 2013. That also means the studio has been working on the game for the past eight years. Not something that’s too hard to believe. Given the extended amount of time for development cycles on larger-than-life games these days. And make no mistake, modern games in the GTA series are certainly larger than life. It’s also worth mentioning that this is still just a rumor and has not been confirmed by Rockstar.

“Bully 2 & 3” found on the Linkedin profile of an ex-Rockstar employee, alongside GTA VI being developed at least since 2015.
by u/KekanKok in GamingLeaksAndRumours

GTA VI development is on pace for a 9-year cycle
For Rockstar, this might just be the longest development cycle for any game in the series. GTA VI is still being worked on. And it’s rumored to be targeting a 2024 holiday release window. If it has indeed been in development since 2015 and it does release during the holidays next year, that will have been a 9-year cycle from start to finish.
That is most certainly the longest Rockstar has spent on any Grand Theft Auto title. But again, not hard to believe given the breadth and scope of GTA V. Not to mention the fact that VI is expected to be at least as big.
In addition to the work on GTA VI, Young’s profile also states he was the lead video editor on various other projects. Including GTA V. Credits also include work on Bully 2 and Bully 3. Both of which appear to have been in development around 2008 but never released. Young also worked on Red Dead Redemption and Undead Nightmare. As well as Red Dead Redemption 2.The post Rumor suggests GTA VI has been in development since 2015 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Mark Zuckerberg uses Android, Elon Musk stans freak out

Apparently, Elon Musk posted a screenshot of his text messages with Mark Zuckerberg over on X this weekend. And the story isn’t what was said during the text exchange, but the fact that Zuck uses an Android. And we can tell this because Musk’s replies to him are in green, indicating SMS instead of iMessage.

ew does zuck have an android?? pic.twitter.com/VpUuMGwd0a
— Tiffany Fong (@TiffanyFong_) August 13, 2023

It’s a bit odd that so many people on X care that Zuck is even using an Android device. But it’s pretty crazy that so many do care about that. Zuck is a billionaire, much like Musk, but for some reason, the fact he uses an Android device is such a big deal.
Now, the text messages themselves talk about how Musk keeps coming up with excuses for not fighting Zuck. And that he doesn’t want to keep hyping up something that won’t happen. To which Musk mentions “let’s fight in your Octagon” after mentioning he will be in Palo Alto on Monday. Musk still really thinks that he can beat Zuck pretty easily, mainly due to the difference in size.
Zuck using Android is not a huge surprise
There’s two reasons why Zuckerberg using an Android phone is not a huge surprise. Firstly, we know that Instagram’s head, Adam Mosseri uses an Android device. In fact, he talked quite extensively on Threads about switching recently. So seeing Zuckerberg using Android is not a big surprise.
The second reason is, Apple cut Facebook’s ad revenue quite considerably a couple years ago with iOS 14.5. When Apple debuted iOS 14.5 a couple years ago, they debuted a feature where the user could decide if the app follows them or not. Obviously, many selected “Ask not to track” for Facebook. Which caused Facebook to lose billions of dollars per year in ad revenue. And it wouldn’t be to crazy to see Zuck make the switch to Android over spite.The post Mark Zuckerberg uses Android, Elon Musk stans freak out appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

LG will offer 2 year warranty for burn-in on its OLED monitors

In recent years, OLED monitors have become an increasingly popular option for gamers who want high refresh rates without compromising picture quality. However, as OLED monitors become more mainstream, the issue of burn-in has once again affected many users. Now, according to a recent report from The Verge, LG has officially confirmed a two-year warranty for burn-in on its monitors in the United States.
This clarification came after The Verge reviewed LG’s flagship 27-inch OLED gaming monitors and highlighted that the warranty did not extend to “burned-in images resulting from improper usage.” After a series of inquiries, Christopher De Maria, LG’s head of consumer PR in the US, provided a definitive response, stating, “LG now offers a two-year burn-in warranty for its OLED gaming displays.” Additionally, the company also highlighted that the updated warranty applies to both current owners of the LG 27GR95QE-B monitor and future buyers.
Some major caveats
While this new burn-in warranty offers a much-needed assurance for OLED monitor buyers, the coverage is contingent upon the monitor experiencing “normal and proper use,” explicitly excluding damage caused by “misuse [or] abuse.” This means that the warranty will cover burn-in as long as an individual uses the monitor for its intended purpose, specifically as a personal PC monitor in a residential setting, excluding commercial applications like retail signage displays. LG does not cover commercial applications due to the prolonged display of static images, which can lead to burn-in.
“Normal use means the product is used for what it was created to do. In this case, that is gaming (professional and casual) as well as desktop computing such as Windows,” said De Maria, LG’s head of consumer PR for North America.
Still better than other manufacturers
Although LG’s warranty coverage comes with conditions, it surpasses that of Acer and Asus, which do not explicitly include burn-in in their formal warranty coverage and address such cases on an individual basis. However, as the industry trends towards more widespread use of OLED monitors, manufacturers will need to enhance their warranty policies to encompass burn-in damage.The post LG will offer 2 year warranty for burn-in on its OLED monitors appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Best iPad Accessories for August 2023

The iPad is arguably the best tablet on the market, whether you’re an Android or iPhone user, it’s the best tablet. For Android users, it’s arguably the best since all of the Google apps are also available on it. And Android tablets kinda suck these days. Though Google is looking to change that.
But if you just bought a new iPad, you might be wondering what the best accessories are to buy for it. Luckily we have you covered there. We have rounded up the best accessories that you can buy. And most of these are available for all iPads. That includes the iPad, iPad Air, iPad Mini and iPad Pro.
Logitech Combo Touch

Price: $190
Where to buy: Amazon
The Logitech Combo Touch is one of my favorite keyboards available for the iPad. And that’s because it is detachable. So you can detach the keyboard from the case on your iPad, and still use your iPad with the kickstand. Making it very versatile. It is not cheap, but it is cheaper than Apple’s options. So there’s that.
This keyboard is available for the iPad Pro in both 11 and 12.9-inch models. As well as the iPad Air 4th and 5th Gen models. It does work with the regular iPad, but not the redesigned 10th generation model, unfortunately.
Logitech Combo Touch – Amazon
Apple AirPods Pro (2nd Generation)

Price: $249
Where to buy: Best Buy
If you don’t already own a pair of AirPods, you should buy a pair. They sound fantastic, and also work flawlessly (most of the time) with Apple products including the iPad.
These are the new second-generation AirPods Pro. Which offer up MagSafe charging among a few other things. MagSafe is really nice to have, as you can just put them down on a MagSafe charger and not worry about it sliding off. This mdoel also includes another pair of eartips, now offering XS, S, M and L.
AirPods Pro do offer up to 6 hours of continuous playback. And the case can charge them a few times. These also include personalized spatial audio with dynamic head tracking, as well as Dolby Atmos.
Apple AirPods Pro (2nd Gen) – Best Buy
Native Union USB-C Braided Cable

Price: $35
Where to buy: Amazon
I know, I know, $35 is a lot for a USB-C cable. Especially when one comes with your iPad. But this cable is still great to pick up and have with you. That’s because it’s a longer cable, coming in at 8-foot long. It’s also branded and has a strap that can keep it together. This makes it great for taking on trips with you. Just toss it in your bag and you’re good to go.
Native Union USB-C Braided Cable – Amazon
Satechi Multi-Angle Foldable Tablet Stand

Price: $39
Where to buy: Amazon
This is an accessory that everyone should have. It’s an adjustable metal stand for the iPad. And it does work with all iPads, in both landscape and portrait mode. Satechi does offer this in a number of different colors as well.
You can put this next to your computer and use SideCar on your iPad with ease. As well as using it as a computer with a wireless keyboard. The possibilities here are endless, and for $40, it’s worth having around.
Satechi Multi-Angle Foldable Tablet Stand – Amazon
Apple Magic Keyboard Folio

Price: $249
Where to buy: Best Buy
This is a new keyboard that Apple announced with the redesigned, iPad 10th generation in the fall of 2022. It, unfortunately, is only available for the 10th Gen iPad. But we think it will be made available to the other iPads, eventually.
This is basically the same as the Magic Keyboard for the iPad Air and iPad Pro, but with three main differences. It has a built-in kickstand. It also detaches from the keyboard. And the Keyboard also has a row of function keys, which is really useful on an iPad.
Apple Magic Keyboard Folio – Best Buy
Apple Pencil (2nd Gen)

Price: $129
Where to buy: Amazon
The Apple Pencil (2nd Generation) is a great accessory for your new iPad. It works with all iPads, except for the regular iPad. It connects to the side of the iPad to sync and charge. It doesn’t take long to charge, either, since it does have a pretty small battery inside.
Apple Pencil is great to use with a variety of drawing apps, as well as for taking notes and so much more. I use mine all the time on my iPad Air to take notes within the Notes app and the newer Freeform app that’s available on all of Apple’s products.
Apple Pencil (2nd Gen) – Amazon
Twelve South HoverBar Duo

Price: $79
Where to buy: Amazon
If you’re looking for a stand, and are willing to spend a bit more, then the Twelve South HoverBar Duo is a really good option. This one allows you to mount it on a table, or shelf, as well as just stand it on your desk. The extra arm gives you more flexibility on how you want it to sit on your desk.
The weighted base keeps it from tipping over, which is a good look from Twelve South. This also allows you to get it up to a good height to use next to your Mac for SideCar. Which the iPad is great for SideCar. Finally, the Twelve South HoverBar Duo does come in two colors – black and white.
Twelve South HoverBar Duo – Amazon
The post Best iPad Accessories for August 2023 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

New KB articles created in July 2023 for vSAN.

KB articles VMware

Stay updated with the latest VMware knowledge base articles released in July 2023. From vSAN performance challenges to storage policy issues and recovery failures, this blog post delves into essential insights that can help you navigate these topics. Whether you’re a VMware enthusiast, IT professional, or curious learner, these articles offer valuable solutions and workarounds to keep your virtualized environments running smoothly. 

The post New KB articles created in July 2023 for vSAN. appeared first on VMware Support Insider.

Source: vmware

Phone Comparisons: Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5 vs Huawei Mate X3

We’re here to compare two book-style foldables, which have a similar form factor, but are quite different at the same time. We’ll compare the Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5 vs Huawei Mate X3. Samsung announced its latest foldables during an event last month, one of which was the Fold 5. The Huawei Mate X3 arrived earlier this year, but it’s still quite compelling. Hardware-wise, many would say it’s more compelling than the Galaxy Z Fold 5.
We will compare these two phones across a number of areas, but we’ll first list their specs. Following that, we’ll compare their designs, displays, performance, battery life, cameras, and audio performance. Let’s see how Samsung’s best foldable compares to Huawei’s, shall we?
Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5 & Huawei Mate X3, respectively
– Screen size (main):
7.6-inch Foldable Dynamic AMOLED 2X display (120Hz, HDR10+, 1,750 nits)
7.85-inch Foldable OLED (120Hz, 1 billion colors)
– Screen Size (cover):
6.2-inch Dynamic AMOLED 2X (120Hz)
6.4-inch OLED (120Hz)
– Display resolution (main):
1812 x 2176
2224 x 2496
– Display resolution (cover):
2316 x 904
2504 x 1080
– SoC:
Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 for Galaxy
Snapdragon 8+ Gen 1
– RAM:
– Storage:
256GB/512GB/1TB (UFS 4.0)
– Rear cameras:
50MP (wide, f/1.8 aperture, Dual Pixel PDAF OIS), 12MP (ultrawide, 123-degree FoV), 10MP (telephoto, 3x optical zoom)
50MP (wide, f/1.8 aperture, PDAF, OIS), 13MP (ultrawide), 12MP (periscope telephoto, 5x optical zoom)
– Front cameras:
4MP (under display, main display, f/1.8 aperture), 10MP (cover display, f/2.2 aperture)
8MP (main and cover display, f/2.4 aperture)
– Battery:
– Charging:
25W wired, 15W wireless, 4.5W reverse wireless (no charger)
66W wired, 50W wireless, 7.5W reverse wireless (charger included)
– Dimensions (unfolded):
154.9 x 129.9 x 6.1mm
156.9 x 141.5 x 5.3mm
– Dimensions (folded):
154.9 x 67.1 x 13.4mm
156.9 x 72.4 x 11.8mm
– Weight:
253 grams
239/241 grams
– Connectivity:
5G, LTE, NFC, Wi-Fi, USB Type-C, Bluetooth 5.3
4G, LTE, NFC, Wi-Fi, USB Type-C, Bluetooth 5.2
– Security:
Side-facing fingerprint scanner
– OS:
Android 13 with One UI
Android with EMUI 13.1, no Google Play Services
– Price:
– Buy:SamsungHuawei
Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5 vs Huawei Mate X3: Design
Both the Galaxy Z Fold 5 and Huawei Mate X3 are made out of metal and glass. It is worth noting that the Mate X3 also comes in an eco leather variant, though. They do have a similar form factor, they’re quite tall when folded, and almost square-shaped when not. The thing is, the Mate X3 does have a more regular aspect ratio on its cover display, the Galaxy Z Fold 5’s is quite narrow.
Both devices include a display camera hole on their cover display, a centered one. The Mate X3 also has one on the main display, in the top-right corner. Samsung hides the selfie camera under the main display of this phone. Both phones have rather thin bezels around both displays. The Galaxy Z Fold 5 has three vertically-aligned cameras on the back. Those cameras are located in the top-left corner, and are a part of the same camera island. The Huawei Mate X3 has a circular camera island on the back, which is centered at the top, and hosts three cameras.
The thing is, the Huawei Mate X3 has larger displays than the Galaxy Z Fold 5, and despite that, it’s considerably lighter. It weighs 239 grams or 241 grams, depending on the model. The Galaxy Z Fold 5 weighs 253 grams. They’re similar in terms of height, while the Mate X3 is wider in both states (folded and unfolded). The Mate X3 is noticeably thinner than the Galaxy Z Fold 5, however, in both folded and unfolded states. Both devices do fold flat, without a gap, and both are IPX8 certified for water resistance.
Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5 vs Huawei Mate X3: Display
A 7.6-inch main display is included on the Galaxy Z Fold 5. That is a Foldable Dynamic AMOLED 2X display with a 120Hz refresh rate. It has a resolution of 1812 x 2176 pixels, and supports HDR10+ content. The cover display on the phone measures 6.2 inches, and has a resolution of 2316 x 904 pixels (23.1:9 aspect ratio). This is also a Dynamic AMOLED 2X panel, with a 120Hz refresh rate. It is protected by the Gorilla Glass Victus 2.

The Huawei Mate X3, on the other hand, includes a 7.85-inch main display. That is a Foldable OLED panel with a 120Hz refresh rate, which can project up to 1 billion colors. The resolution here is 2224 x 2496. The cover display on the phone measures 6.4 inches. That is an OLED panel with a 120Hz refresh rate. It has a resolution of 2504 x 1080, and it’s protected by Huawei’s Kunlun glass.
All four displays are really good, actually. They offer good, vivid colors, deep blacks, and good viewing angles. They’re more than sharp enough, and also bright enough. The Galaxy Z Fold 5 does have a brighter main panel, though, with a limit of 1,750 nits. The cover displays are well-protected on both phones, and seeing a 120Hz refresh rate on all panels is always good. The cover display on the Mate X3 is more useful, though, as it’s not as narrow as on the Galaxy Z Fold 5.
Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5 vs Huawei Mate X3: Performance
The Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 for Galaxy fuels the Galaxy Z Fold 5. Samsung also included 12GB of LPDDR5X RAM on the phone, and UFS 4.0 flash storage too. The Huawei Mate X3, on the other hand, utilizes the Snapdragon 8+ Gen 1 SoC, a variant that is limited to 4G connectivity. We’re not sure about what LPDDR and UFS modules Huawei used exactly, but it’s most likely LPDDR5 and UFS 3.1 or 4.0.
When it comes to general performance, the two phones are on par. Day-to-day performance is extremely snappy on both, and that goes for multitasking as well. If you delve into gaming, you’ll also get great performance from both phones. The Galaxy Z Fold 5 could handle the most demanding games a bit better, but both are quite capable from what we’ve seen. They do get warm, but not overly hot or anything of the sort. The Galaxy Z Fold 5 is more future-proof, though, and the Mate X3 doesn’t include Google services, which is worth noting.
Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5 vs Huawei Mate X3: Battery
A 4,400mAh battery sits inside the Galaxy Z Fold 5, while a 4,800mAh one is included inside the Huawei Mate X3. The Mate X3 does have larger displays, so it makes sense it has a larger battery too. What’s the battery life like, though? Well, it’s really good on both phones. Getting to 7 hours of screen-on-time is easily possible on both phones, though your mileage may vary. Truth be said, we did fly under the 7-hour mark on the Galaxy Z Fold 5 sometimes, but usually it was able to cross that mark. The Mate X3 does seem to offer a bit better battery life, though.
Your mileage may vary, though, of course. There are two screens to consider here, on both phones, while your usage will be different, as will your signal strengths, and installed apps. Also, if you’re planning to play games, that will considerably impact battery life on both phones, which may mess things up even further. We only played games for testing purposes, on regular days, we did not.
When it comes to charging, the Mate X3 shames the Galaxy Z Fold 5. It supports 66W wired, 50W wireless, and 7.5W reverse wireless charging. The Galaxy Z Fold 5 supports 25W wired, 15W wireless, and 4.5W reverse wireless charging. Needless to say, the Huawei Mate X3 will charge up a lot faster, both via a wire, and wirelessly. It also includes a charger in the box, unlike the Galaxy Z Fold 5.
Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5 vs Huawei Mate X3: Cameras
A 50-megapixel main camera is included on the Galaxy Z Fold 5. In addition to that, there is also a 12-megapixel ultrawide camera (123-degree FoV), and a 10-megapixel telephoto unit (3x optical zoom). The Huawei Mate X3, on the other hand, also has three cameras on the back. A 50-megapixel main camera is backed by a 13-megapixel ultrawide camera, and a 12-megapixel periscope telephoto camera (5x optical zoom).

The images from the Galaxy Z Fold 5 do end up looking more processed. The Huawei Mate X3 keeps things a bit closer to real life, but the images from the phone are far from plain. We prefer the Huawei Mate X3 here. Both phones do end up offering sharp images, and both phones handle HDR conditions really well. Even in low light, both devices are very capable, and manage to keep around plenty of details. The Mate X3 does handle street flares a bit better, though.
When it comes to ultrawide cameras, they’re following the main camera’s colors really well, but are a step below what the main cameras can do. They do a solid job in low light, though. When it comes to telephoto cameras, we definitely prefer the Mate X3’s, as it can zoom further without losing a lot of details. The telephoto camera on the Galaxy Z Fold 5 is also quite useful, though.
Both phones feature stereo speakers, and both sets of speakers are loud enough. They’re not the best out there, but they’re loud. They’re also quite detailed, and there’s no distortion you should worry about. The sound is also well-balanced.
Neither device has a 3.5mm headphone jack, so you’ll have to rely on their Type-C ports for wired audio connections. If you opt for a wireless connection, do note that the Galaxy Z Fold 5 supports Bluetooth 5.3, while the Huawei Mate X3 offers Bluetooth 5.2.The post Phone Comparisons: Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5 vs Huawei Mate X3 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

AI-powered chips would reinvent computers, NVIDIA CEO says

NVIDIA CEO Jensen Huang believes AI-powered chips can reinvent computers, and AI platforms are the future of computing, The Street reports.
AI is pegging itself as an integral part of everyday life, and its scope is remarkably growing. It is changing the meaning and nature of every device we already know, and computers won’t be an exception. As a leading brand in the semiconductor industry, NVIDIA is now preparing for the next-generation computers that are totally powered by AI.
NVIDIA CEO lays out visions for computers with AI-powered chips
CEO Jensen Huang said on August 8 that an AI technology powered by Nvidia’s chips will “reinvent the computer itself.” Additionally, powerful new AI platforms are on the way to replace the computing platforms we currently know.
“Large language model is a new computing platform because now the programming language is human,” Huang said. “For the very first time, after 15 years or so, a new computing platform has emerged. The computer itself will, of course, process information in a very different way.”
NVIDIA CEO added that his company’s accelerated computing will work to align computers and computing platforms with large language models. Of course, Huang mentioned that the upcoming environment that generative AI fuels requires a tremendous amount of cloud.
To support this growing demand in the cloud environment, Huang said NVIDIA is giving a “boost” to its Grace Hopper Superchip processor. The new chip will be called “GH200” and is combined with the world’s fastest memory chip, HBM3.
“The chips are in production. This processor is designed to scale out of the world’s data centers. It basically turns these two super chips into a super-sized super chip,” Huang noted.
The NVIDIA CEO also said companies will be able to put any large language model they like into this chip, and “it will infer like crazy.” Additionally, the inference cost of large language models will drop significantly.
The growing demands in the semiconductors industry caused NVIDIA to surpass over $1 trillion in valuation. The financial reports are also painting a rosy picture of the company’s situation. Beyond that, AI-powered chips can give an unbeatable competitive advantage to NVIDIA and reinvent the meaning of computers for users.The post AI-powered chips would reinvent computers, NVIDIA CEO says appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Alleged PS5 with a removable disc drive shows up in leaked video

The PS5 with a removable disc drive appears to have shown up in a leaked video, and looks a lot like the leaked image that was thought to be of the PS5 slim from earlier this morning. The only real telling detail is the black line that travels along the side of the console cover on each side. Which suggests the two are one in the same.
The video leak however shows a lot more of the console in question. It’s not clear if this is a real working unit or if it’s simply a demo shell. Or if it’s even a legitimate design in the first place. Either way, if the design is accurate it’s clear that this certainly isn’t a slim version of the PS5. While the leaked video doesn’t show the unit plugged in or working, it does show the console off from nearly all angles. There are a couple of notable details worth pointing out too.
The video does appear to show a PS5 with a removable disc drive unit
You only get a brief look. But if you watch closely you can see where it appears the main console unit is separated from the disc drive portion. As the console is tipped to show the bottom, you can see a line that runs from the front to the back that splits the area where the drive is from the rest of the console.
Another notable change is that this unit doesn’t have a USB-A port on the front. On the existing PS5 version, there’s one USB-A port and one USB-C port. The unit in this video has two USB-C ports. Suggesting Sony has decided to replace the USB-A port for another USB-C option. The video doesn’t really give a good look at that back. So it’s unclear if there are still two USB-A ports there. But it wouldn’t make sense to remove one on the front and then remove the back ones also.
For the most part, this PS5 doesn’t look much different. If it is in fact a new model with a revised design.

CFI-2016 PS5 Case pic.twitter.com/udFyQbVpz8
— BwE (@BwE_Dev) August 11, 2023
The post Alleged PS5 with a removable disc drive shows up in leaked video appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Samsung pushes August update to Galaxy S22 series in the US

A couple of days back, Samsung released the August 2023 security update for the Galaxy S22 series in Latin America. The update has now crossed boundaries to reach the US. More precisely, the company is pushing the new SMR (Security Maintenance Release) to its 2022 flagships in Puerto Rico. It should soon be available in the mainland US as well. Users in other parts of the world can also expect to receive the latest security patch in the coming days.
Samsung‘s August SMR is currently rolling out to factory-unlocked variants of the Galaxy S22, Galaxy S22+, and Galaxy S22 Ultra in Puerto Rico. The new firmware build number for the phones is S90*U1UES3CWG2. The official changelog supplied by the Korean firm reveals that the devices aren’t getting anything more than this month’s security patches. Users in Latin America also only received the August SMR and nothing else.
As said earlier, Samsung will soon expand the rollout of the August SMR for the Galaxy S22 series to other parts of the US as well as the rest of the world. The update will also be available for users with carrier-locked units. The build number may vary, but the changelog should remain the same. The company has already revealed that the latest security patch contains fixes for more than 80 vulnerabilities, including at least three critical patches.
If you’re using a Galaxy S22, Galaxy S22+, or Galaxy S22 Ultra, you can expect to receive a notification promoting you to download the August update in the coming days. You can tap on the notification and follow the on-screen instructions to install the latest security enhancements on your phone. You can also navigate to Settings > Software update > Download and install to check for new OTA (over the air) updates manually.
Samsung has begun beta testing the Android 14 update for Galaxy devices
As Samsung pushes the August SMR to more Galaxy devices, the company is also simultaneously beta-testing the Android 14 update. The first beta build of the big Android update, which brings the company’s One UI 6.0 custom software, is now available for the Galaxy S23 series in Germany, South Korea, and the US.
Interested Galaxy S23 users in these countries can enroll in the One UI 6.0 beta program from the Samsung Members app. The company is expected to open the beta program for more devices and expand the availability to other countries later this month. The stable update should arrive in November, if not earlier.The post Samsung pushes August update to Galaxy S22 series in the US appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Titan Quest II announced after 17-year series hiatus

THQ Nordic has just officially announced Titan Quest II after the series has basically been on hiatus for the past 17 years. Originally released in 2006, the first Titan Quest took the popular action RPG genre and put a Greek mythology spin on it. The second title follows in those footsteps and appears to have a big focus on character customization and letting the player forge their own path and control their fate.
Titan Quest II was announced as part of THQ Nordic’s 2023 Digital Showcase. During the livestream, the studio showed off a two and a half minute-long cinematic trailer, and not much else. It does confirm though that it will have more to share in the coming months. Including more details about the game’s features and actual gameplay. This doesn’t mean there’s nothing to know though. The game’s official landing page is already up and it gives a brief rundown of what players can expect.
Titan Quest II will stick to the top-down action RPG formula

Fans of the original game will be happy to know THQ Nordic isn’t changing the core of the game. It’s still a top-down action RPG and will feature meaningful combat that won’t just be mindless attacks. Players will want to put some thought into their class builds to ensure they stand up to the challenges ahead.
However, this doesn’t mean the game will obscenely complex. Nor will players just be looking for gear that has slightly better stats than the last piece they picked up. “Every item serves a function, and every character class has many options when it comes to finding the perfect equipment,” THQ Nordic says. The game will also have an exploration-focused campaign. So to the players that love to search every single nook and cranny of a game’s map or overworld, this is where you’ll shine. It pays to be curious, and curious is what you’ll need to be if you want to find some of the no doubt powerful items and many secrets that Titan Quest II has to offer.
The game should provide a nice level of challenge for just about anyone. To that end the studio even talks briefly about enemies. Noting that enemy factions will work together and combine their unique skills and abilities to fight against you. If you haven’t seen the cinematic you can watch it below. And you can check out what little detail there is about at the official landing page. THQ Nordic has announced a release date yet. But with Titan Quest II still in early development it probably isn’t coming anytime soon.
The post Titan Quest II announced after 17-year series hiatus appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Feast your eyes on the new Bose QuietComfort Ultra headphones

This might be your first real look at the upcoming flagship noise-cancelling headphones from Bose, the QuietComfort Ultra, thanks to a partnership leak from Onleaks and MySmartPrice (via Android Police).
The QuietComfort Ultra should be the replacement for the Bose Noise-Cancelling Headphones 700 according to the leak. Which would probably put them in the price range of $379. However it’s worth mentioning that there is no confirmed information about the price of the headphones yet. Bose also hasn’t announced these officially yet. But going off of the price of the Bose Noise-Cancelling 700, which are $379, it seems like a reasonable assumption for the cost. As Bose generally hasn’t changed pricing too much on headphones when it releases a new pair. The QuietComfort 35 II for example were around $349 when they initially launched back in 2017.
The QuietComfort 45, their replacement, launched at the same price. Although they have been discounted to $329 before and you can currently find them for around $279. Again though, this doesn’t mean Bose will price the QuietComfort Ultra the same as the Noise-Cancelling 700. The leak for example mentions pricing around €499.95 in France. Which might mean a higher price tag of $499 in the US. That would also put them well above the price range of Sony’s XM5 headphones. Which are typically their competitor. This is all speculative of course.
Based on the image renders, the QuietComfort Ultra will look pretty similar to the QuietComfort 45 and QuietComfort 35 II. An interesting choice if these are to be a follow-up for the Bose Noise-Cancelling 700.
The leak also includes the Bose QuietComfort Ultra earbuds

The leak shows off the design of the new headphones, but it also includes images of the earbuds. So it looks like Bose is finally ready to replace both products. According to the leaked images for both products, Bose will offer two colors for each. The standard black and then a lighter beige color.
Bose doesn’t have a launch date for these yet nor is there any indication of availability. But expect both to be available globally as most or all of Bose’s flagship stuff is. Just like with the headphones Bose’s upcoming true wireless earbuds will come in black and what appears to be a beige color option. With match charging cases.The post Feast your eyes on the new Bose QuietComfort Ultra headphones appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Google is working to make Android devices communicate better with each other

In this day and age, integration is the name of the game. It’s not only important that our devices work, it’s also important that they work well with other devices. Google is working on a new Link Your Devices feature for Android that will help your devices better communicate with one another.
Tech users are liable to own more than one device nowadays. They’ll have a tablet for media consumption and a phone for phone calls and games. Well, companies put a lot of effort into making these devices communicate seamlessly with one another. Apple is still the pioneer in this department and other companies are playing catch-up. Well, Google, the owner of Android, has the power to bring some strong integration to the platform.
Google’s bringing the Link Your Devices feature to Android
Android is pretty integrated, but it could still use some improvements. Thanks to a new report from 9To5Google, it looks like Google is looking to bring those improvements. As spotted by @Nail_Sadykov on Twitter, Android is preparing to bring a new Link Your Devices menu. This will be a hub showing different ways that you can share functionality between devices.
This is buried in the code at the moment, so you can’t access it. Right now, the menu only shows one thing that you’ll be able to do. The Call Switching feature will allow you to seamlessly switch ongoing calls between different devices. This is a neat feature to have, and we’ve seen it implemented by other companies before.
Other than that, we don’t know about any other features that the company is going to bring. Mishaal Rahman noted that Google could come out with an Internet Sharing feature, but we don’t see that functionality in the screenshot.
Only time will tell what Google has planned for this feature. Also, we’re not sure when the company is going to launch this hub. Since there was only one feature visible, we don’t know if the company is still working on more features to populate the menu. Android 14 is soon to hit the stable channel, this might be an included feature.The post Google is working to make Android devices communicate better with each other appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

NVIDIA 40-series GPU purchases get you an Overwatch 2 bundle

NVIDIA is no stranger to offering bundle deals when you buy some of its graphics cards, and now it’s running one with Blizzard’s Overwatch 2. Specifically, for the Overwatch 2: Invasion bundle.
If you’re an Overwatch 2 fan, then you probably already know that Blizzard just launched the new Invasion content. Which includes new story missions for players to get some extra experiences out of what is an otherwise PvP dominated game. This content isn’t free though. You do have to buy it and there are a couple of different options. The regular bundle and the Ultimate bundle. NVIDIA wants to give you that content as a bonus for picking up one of its GPUs. There are caveats though. So here’s what you’re looking at if you decide to take NVIDIA up on this offer.
The NVIDIA deal gets you a free Overwatch 2: Invasion Ultimate bundle
Right off the bat, it’s not recommended to get a new GPU just to get this bundle for free. And you likely already know that. But we’re mentioning it anyway. However, it’s a nice pickup if you’re planning on a GPU upgrade. So here’s what you’re getting.
If you buy select NVIDIA GeForce RTX 40-series GPUs, you’ll get the Ultimate bundle for free. That’s $40 you won’t have to spend. And in the bundle you get the Invasion story mission unlocks, the Invasion battle pass + 20 tier skips, 2,000 Overwatch coins, the earnable Vigilante Sojourn legendary skin, an immediate unlock of Sojourn as a playable hero, the C-455 Sharpshooter Cassidy Legendary Skin, and the K-2000 Blademaster Kiriko Legendary Skin.
These are good bonuses if you play the game and play often enough. Even if you don’t and just want access to the Invasion story missions, all the rest of are decent freebies if you’re already looking into a 40-series GPU upgrade. So what device would you have to buy? NVIDIA doesn’t mention any specifics. It just says “qualifying” desktops or laptops with an RTX 40-series GPU inside, or a qualifying purchase of a 40-series GPU itself. NVIDIA’s terms list all the cards in the 40-series so your list of qualifying purchases should be pretty long.
Lastly, if this seems like a good deal to you, you have until September 9 to make a qualifying purchase. And once you do, you need to redeem the Overwatch 2 bundle by October 9. So you definitely need to be considering a purchase like this fairly soon for this to be worth it.The post NVIDIA 40-series GPU purchases get you an Overwatch 2 bundle appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

The PlayStation 5 Slim may have surfaced in a leaked image

A new image has recently leaked online that is suspected to be of the PS5 Slim, giving gamers their first look at Sony’s more compact version of the console. Spotted by Insider Gaming, this image of the slimmer version of the PS5 is said to have come from the same forum that leaked accurate images of the PS5’s white console cover. So there is a little bit of evidence there to suggest that this may be a legit design. With that said, Insider Gaming also notes that the image hasn’t been verified yet.
So it is also just as possible that the PS5 Slim leak isn’t accurate. Taking all of that into account, the PS5 is coming up on its three years since launch. If Sony goes by a similar release schedule, then we could very well see a slim console this year. For example, the PS4 was originally released on November 15 of 2013. Just under three years later in September of 2016, Sony released the PS4 Slim. This is no guarantee it will do the same thing with this generation. But it certainly does seem possible. Especially when you factor in other details like this leaked image. As well as previous rumors that Sony had plans to release a slim console in late 2023.
The leak suggests this PS5 isn’t actually “slim”
While the rumor references this as a potential PS5 Slim, it’s also important to note that it may not actually be physically slimmer than the original PS5. At least not in the way that the PS4 Slim was to the PS4. That because the leak (translated by Google via the X post) suggests the image is of the PS5 with a removable disc drive. So the console could technically be slimmer when the drive isn’t attached. According to the translation though the console has the same thickness as the original. But it also states that the console’s height is about 5cm lower.
There’s also a black slit along the sides of the console. And although the image is too grainy to tell with complete accuracy, it looks like you can see the “Sony” branding on the inside corner of the right console cover. Just like on the original versions of the PS5. As with every take everything with a grain of salt. But this may indeed be Sony’s official design.

噂: ディスクドライブ着脱式新型PS5 のパッケージを入手したという中国からのリーク(信憑性は不明)
‐前面には2つのType-Cポート pic.twitter.com/4hOiuz0BLf
— のわの:げーみんぐ (@Gust_FAN) August 11, 2023
The post The PlayStation 5 Slim may have surfaced in a leaked image appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Top 10 best retro Android games

The Google Play Store is home to all the most modern games for modern audiences. But you’re not looking for that; you’re looking to relive those memories of staying up past your bedtime playing video games back in the 80s or 90s. While those days are gone, they’re not really gone. Here’s a list of the best Retro games you can play on your Android device.
This is a list of games that transport us back through time. They’re either re-releases of classic games or modern games that strive to give a classic feeling. These include pixelated games. Be sure to check back to see more titles added each month.
Download Cost: $2.99
In-App Cost: None
Size: 31MB
Google Play Rating: 4.5 stars out of 5
One of the games that defined the RPG genre, Dragon Quest is a franchise that’s still relevant today. If you want to relive playing the original game, or if you want to experience it for the first time, well there’s good news. The original Dragon Quest is available on the Play Store.
This game was re-released by Square Enix, the original developer, and it’s been rebuilt from the ground up to work on mobile. You’ll use the on-screen joystick and buttons to control the characters and do battle. It will take a little getting used to if you’re used to playing the original. However, you’ll get the hang of it.
Game Dev Story
Download Cost: $4.49
In-App Cost: None
Size: 40MB
Google Play Rating: 4.8 stars out of 5
You play games, but what if you want to actually make them? In Game Dev Story, this is exactly what you’ll do. While Game Dev Story is a pretty old game itself, it’s not exactly a 90s title. However, the pixelated graphics and limited animations give you that classic game feeling. It reminds you of the 16-bit games on the Sega Genesis and Super Nintendo.
In this game, you’ll create your own game dev studio and get to work making your games. When you start a project, you’ll choose the platform/console you want it on, then you’ll start choosing the genre, game type, and the aspects you want to focus on. After that, you’ll choose an artist, writer, and composer for the game. Lastly, you’ll finish up by naming the game and fixing the bugs.
You’ll focus on other aspects of running a gaming studio. You’ll hire and train staff, attend conventions, keep an eye on which gaming platforms are still relevant, and do side jobs to earn more money. Also, as you play, you’ll move to bigger game studios.
Download Game Dev Story
Pocket Trains
Download Cost: Free
In-App Cost: $0.99 – $19.99
Size: 62MB
Google Play Rating: 4.1 stars out of 5
The world has not moved on from good old 8-bit graphics. Pocket Trains is a fun and relaxing game where you manage your own train empire. If you’re a fan of retro graphics, then you’ll like the 8-bit graphics that are in the game. While they’re 8-bit, they still look really nice.
The point of this game is to grow your train empire by delivering packages to different cities around the world. You’ll start off with a handful of trains in the heart of Europe. You’ll use those trains to deliver packages to their designated locations. When you do, you’ll either earn money, bux (the premium currency), or crates (you’ll open those for parts to build and repair trains).
As you play, you’ll unlock more tracks and expand your empire. Also, you’ll build more trains that you can name and customize. It’s a fun and relaxing game to play and pass the time.
Download Pocket Trains
Download Cost: Free
In-App Cost: $0.99 – $79.99
Size: 118MB
Google Play Rating: 4.2 stars out of 5
It doesn’t get much more classic than Tetris. We’ve seen this re-released about a thousand times, and the mobile market is no different. Right now, you can download the official Tetris game on the Google Play Store. While it’s the classic game, it’s been modernized with newer graphics and some new mechanics.
While this is a game that needs no introduction, here’s a quick rundown. You’ll see an empty column, and there will be blocks slowly dropping to the bottom. As they fall to the bottom, they’ll stack up. What you need to do is make sure that you make complete rows of the blocks. When that happens, you’ll see those rows disappear. You’ll need to make as many complete rows before the blocks reach the top. It’s almost 40 years old, and the gameplay still hasn’t changed.
Download Tetris
Sonic The Hedgehog 2 Classic
Download Cost: Free
In-App Cost: $1.99
Size: 83MB
Google Play Rating: 4.3 stars out of 5
This is a game that’s survived the test of time, and you can have it on your phone/tablet for only $2. Sonic 2 was one of the most memorable games on the Sega Genesis. The sequel to the smash hit Sonic The Hedgehog (the game that single-handedly saved the Sega Genesis), Sonic 2 takes Sonic and Tails through 11 zones with boss battles at the end of most of them.
This was the first game to use the classic spin dash, and it broke boundaries with its faux-3D special stages. It’s still as fun today as it was back in 1992. If you’re feeling nostalgic, you should pick it up.
Download Sonic The Hedgehog 2 Classic
Download Cost: Free
In-App Cost: $0.99 – $99.99
Size: 152MB
Google Play Rating: 4.3 stars out of 5
Whether you were playing this game in the arcades in the 80s or as a port in later decades, Pac-Man still remains one of the most famous classic games in the world. While not many of those arcade cabinets still stand, you can still experience this game. Pac-Man is live on the Google Play Store. We’re not talking about a remake or rip-off. This was posted by Bandai-Namco itself, the company that owns the rights to this game.
Since this is the original game, the gameplay is the exact same. You’re collecting pellets, avoiding ghosts, and wracking up a high score.
Download PAC-MAN
Minesweeper Classic
Download Cost: Free
In-App Cost: $0.99 – $9.99
Size: 31MB
Google Play Rating: 4.6 stars out of 5
We all remember the torment of going onto the family computer and trying to figure out how Minesweeper worked. Many of us still feel bad about killing that poor yellow guy on the top of the window. Well, there are those of us who still want to re-experience and finally beat this guessing game.
You’ll start by picking one space. When you do that (if it’s not a mine, that is), you’ll see a seemingly random assortment of numbers appear on the board. Those numbers represent the number of adjacent blocks that are mines. You’ll need to use your power of deduction to side-step all of the potential mines.
Download Minesweeper Classic
Gameloft Classics
Download Cost: Free
In-App Cost: None
Size: 96MB
Google Play Rating: 4.3 stars out of 5
You might not be familiar with the name Gameloft, but you’re most likely familiar with one of this company’s most popular games Asphalt 9: Legends. Well, the company has been around since 1999, and it has a library of classic games that it made before it became a mobile game empire.
To commemorate its 20th year anniversary, the company released a collection of its older games. It’s a launcher that you can use to play a plethora of Gameloft hits. These include games like the original N.O.V.A and Modern Fight. You can switch between these games and play them at your fancy.
Download Gameloft Classics
The Way Home
Download Cost: Free
In-App Cost: $6.99
Google Play Rating: 4.6 stars out of 5
The Way Home is a modern-day rogue-like that has the pixelated art style of a classic game from the 90s. Not only are the graphics pleasantly archaic, but the music and sound effects also have that classic sound.
In this game, you’re stranded on a strange island, and you’re trying to make your way back home. While you’re on the island, you’ll encounter different strange creatures that you need to fend off. You’ll do this while you’re gathering materials to craft the essentials you need to survive. It’s a great game to play if you’re looking for some light nostalgic fun.
Download The Way Home
Retro Bowl
Download Cost: Free
In-App Cost: $0.99 – $9.99
Size: 18MB
Google Play Rating: 4.7 stars out of 5
This one is for all you sports fans out there. Retro Bowl, as the name indicates, is a retro football game that lets you create and manage your own football team. You get a classic pixelated look with the 8-bit-style graphics.
This isn’t as much a football simulator as it is a football manager simulator. So, you won’t take direct action in the matches. You will see a sped-up version of the matches so that you can see how they go. Rather than playing in the matches, you’ll be managing your team. Tasks include choosing and managing your roster, managing the finances, choosing the games you’ll play, etc. It’s a very behind-the-scenes type of game.
Download Retro BowlThe post Top 10 best retro Android games appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

The Quake II remaster lands on Xbox, PlayStation, and PC today

Earlier this week it was rumored that the legendary FPS Quake II would be getting a remastered version, and today the game has been made official with an immediate launch.
Announced during today’s QuakeCon 2023 event, id Software and Bethesda Softworks are bringing Quake II back. It’s better than ever and has been enhanced with new features, such as up to 4K widescreen support, enhanced cinematics and visual effects, and much, much more. There’s also improved AI and improved animations and gore for those who like their Quake II playthroughs as bloody as possible.
All-in-all the game has been touched up with loads of enhancements to fit modernized platforms. Plus, you get a lot of content with it. This remaster includes the base game plus both of its original expansions – Mission Pack: The Reckoning and Mission Pack: Ground Zero. On top of that, there’s an all-new expansion included titled Call of the Machine. This adds 28 new campaign levels and a new Deathmatch map. This would already be an insanely good value if there wasn’t a single thing more beyond all this. But being the benevolent developers they are, id added more. Much more.
The enhanced version also includes the N64 port of Quake II. And it features cross-play multiplayer. So you can play with friends no matter the platform they play on.
Quake II will launch today on all platforms for $9.99
No matter how you slice it, there’s a lot of value here with this game. All that content for $9.99 is pretty good. Perhaps best of all though is that it launches on basically every platform. PC, Xbox Series X|S, Xbox One, PS5, PS4, and Nintendo Switch. It’s even available on Game Pass if you have a subscription. And, it’s confirmed that the Game Pass version can be played in the cloud if your subscription is for an Ultimate membership. So you really can play just about anywhere.
One thing to keep in mind is that PC and Xbox players do get a couple of extra features. Namely 8-player split screen and gyro aiming. If those are things you think you might want, we’d suggest picking up the game there.
The post The Quake II remaster lands on Xbox, PlayStation, and PC today appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

AMD made a limited-edition Starfield GPU for a giveaway

AMD is the official partner for Starfield, and to commemorate that partnership as well as celebrate the game’s upcoming launch, it’s created a limited-edition Starfield GPU and CPU. These are special branded versions of already available products. Specifically, the AMD Ryzen 7 7800X3D processor, and the AMD Radeon RX 7900 XTX Graphics Card.
For the mega fan looking forward to Starfield, these would be a nice addition to your setup. However, these are extremely limited. Unveiled this morning during QuakeCon 2023, AMD says there were only 500 of these bundles made. So getting one isn’t as simple as pulling out your wallet and hoping to get one before AMD runs out of stock. In fact, you can’t even pull out your wallet and buy one at all.
The AMD Starfield GPU and CPU are for giveaways only

While there are no doubt plenty of people who would be willing to spend the money on these, that isn’t going to be possible. AMD created them as a fun giveaway item for 500 lucky winners. The more unfortunate thing is that there’s no way to win one at this point. That is unless you’re at QuakeCon.
AMD confirmed during its segment of the QuakeCon livestream that there would be 499 of these bundles given away throughout QuakeCon. So there’s still a chance to get these if you’re there. The other bundle was given away on AMD’s Twitch channel at the time of the announcement, which has since passed. It’s not all bad though. While you won’t be able to get your hands on these specially crafted pieces of PC hardware, you can still get the normal versions of these and score a free copy of Starfield.
And that’s a nice consolation prize if you ask me. Starfield officially releases on September 6 and will be available on PC via Steam and on Xbox Series X|S. You can also play it through Xbox Game Pass on day one. Which is likely to be the way that many people access it. You know, since it won’t cost anything more than the Game Pass membership fee.
The post AMD made a limited-edition Starfield GPU for a giveaway appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Top 10 VMware Knowledge Base Articles: Troubleshooting Tips for Redis, RabbitMQ, and GemFire in July, 2023

VMware Tanzu, Knowledge Base, Linux troubleshooting, YARN, HDFS, Hive, configuration issues, query failures, step-by-step instructions, ping command failure, Hadoop

Tweet Explore the top 10 most popular knowledge base articles for Redis, RabbitMQ, and GemFire. These articles provide valuable insights and solutions to common challenges faced by users of these powerful data management and messaging platforms. From optimizing socket buffer sizes in GemFire to setting up Redis master-slave replication and addressing RabbitMQ queue deletion issues, … Continued

The post Top 10 VMware Knowledge Base Articles: Troubleshooting Tips for Redis, RabbitMQ, and GemFire in July, 2023 appeared first on VMware Support Insider.

Source: vmware

Top 10 VMware Tanzu KB Articles for DevAps for July, 2023

Tweet This blog post highlights the top 10 most popular knowledge articles for DevAps in July. The articles cover a range of topics. Each article provides insights, instructions, and resolutions to common challenges faced by developers and operations teams.  This article explains how to generate a self-signed SSL certificate using the Java keytool command for Apache … Continued

The post Top 10 VMware Tanzu KB Articles for DevAps for July, 2023 appeared first on VMware Support Insider.

Source: vmware

How to use Shortwave email

There are a ton of different email clients out there, but there’s a new one on the scene that has an interesting (and familiar) hook to it. It’s called Shortwave, and it’s a platform that could transform how you think about emails. Here’s a useful guide on how to use Shortwave and what it’s all about.
What is Shortwave?
Back in 2014, Google brought an app called Inbox, and this app had an interesting take on email. Inbox took emails and bundled them into groups, which created a much cleaner interface. It was a popular platform, but this is a Google product we’re talking about. It was bound to be discontinued prematurely, and that’s what happened. About five years after it came, the company brought down the ax.
Well, an ex-Google employee started working on the platform’s spiritual successor. Shortwave is an application that takes the core functionality brought by Inbox and brings it back. Just like Inbox, emails from the same source are automatically grouped into bundles.
Say, if you get several emails from Reddit about posts and comments. Normally, you’ll see these emails scattered throughout your inbox. With Shortwave, all of those emails will be grouped into a bundle. The bundle takes up as much space as a single email. When you tap on the bundle, it’ll expand so that you can access each of the emails individually.
Getting the program
So, if you’re tired of the chronological email feed, then you should give this app a try. It’s been in beta testing for a year and a half, but it’s out to be used by the public.
Get the app
Ok, so Shortwave is now available on the Google Play Store, iOS App Store, and on your computer. Choose the link below to download the app on your preferred platform.
Download on the Play Store – 8MB
Download on the iOS App Store – 15.8MB
Getting it on Desktop
There’s no official desktop application for Shortwave. So, if you want to use it on the computer, you’ll have to use the website. However, if you want to install it on your desktop, it’s easy to do so. Just know that this is only supported on Chromium-based browsers. These include Google Chrome, Microsoft Edge, Opera, and more.
So, you will not be able to install it if you use Firefox or Apple’s Safari. First, follow the link below:
Shortwave desktop client
This will take you to the desktop website. Sign in with your Gmail account. When you do that, you’ll be taken to your inbox. Look up at the address bar near the right side of the browser. you’ll see the option to install the app onto your desktop. On Chrome, it will look like a little computer monitor with a downward-pointing arrow. In Edge, it will look like a square with a “+” symbol.
When you click on it, the browser will ask you to confirm this information. After that, you’ll see the Shortwave icon on your desktop. Clicking on it will open a mini browser that will display only the Shortwave website.
How to use Shortwave
When you open the app, you’ll be greeted with your main inbox. By default, all emails from the same source will be grouped into bundles. You’ll see how many emails are in a bundle right next to the sender’s name. Tapping on the bundle will open a new page with all of the emails displayed.
Using bundles
The bundles are a pretty big part of the whole experience. They help make the interface less cluttered and easier to navigate. As stated before, the emails come bundled automatically.
The name of the bundle will be set to the name of the source. If you want to rename the bundle, it’s easy to do. Unfortunately, you’re not able to change the name using the mobile app. You’ll need to use the desktop version.

Tap on the bundle and tap on the three-dot menu on the top of the screen. In the resulting menu, tap on the Add Note button. When you look at the Bundle’s name, it will be replaced with the text “Add Note”. Go back to your inbox and click on that text. It will be a text field that will allow you to type in your own name.
If Shortwave bundled emails that you don’t want to be bundled, you can unbundle them. Go back to the three-dot menu and tap on the Unbundle button. This will ungroup these emails and each one will go to their chronological spot in your feed.
If you change your mind, or you unbundle the emails by accident, you can re-bundle them by tapping on the Undo button in the popup that appears at the bottom of the screen.
Pinning emails/bundles
If there’s a bundle or conversation that you want to display above the rest, you can simply pin it. Tap on the email conversation or bundle you want to pin. At the top right of the UI, you’ll see different actions that you can do for the email. You’ll see a thumbtack icon; tap on it.
This will pin the bundle or email conversation to the top of your feed. The emails will stay at the top of the feed even if you get new emails. You can pin multiple emails to the top of your feed, and they’ll occupy their own section above the feed.

For an even quicker way, simply swipe left on the email or bundle you want to pin. You’ll see a blue pin icon appear. Let go to pin the conversation, just be sure not to pull too far because you’ll eventually, you’ll snooze the email.
To unpin a conversation, just swipe left on it to reverse. If you’re in the conversation, tap on the pin icon on the top right of the UI.
Snoozing conversations
If there’s an email that you want to get to later, but you don’t want to forget about it, you can snooze it. This will hide the email until a designated time and then resend a notification when the time comes.
To snooze a conversation, tap on it. On the top right of the UI, right next to the Pin icon, you’ll see a clock icon. Tapping on that icon will bring up a little popup window with some options for how long to snooze your email. If one of them appeals to you, just tap on it. If not, then tap on the Pick a time option. This option will let you choose the date and time that you want to snooze the email until.

A quick way to snooze an email is to swipe left on a conversation until your finger reaches the edge of the screen. You’ll see the pin icon first then you’ll see the clock icon.
Sending and replying to emails
Shortwave offers an easy and straightforward interface for sending and replying to emails. On the mobile version, you’ll see the Compose button on the bottom bar right next to the search button. The screen will turn into the composer where you’ll be able to enter the recipient, subject, and the contents of your message.

On the desktop version, you’ll see the Compose button on the top left of the interface. It’s the pencil icon right under your profile picture. You’ll see a message composer open up on the bottom left of the screen.
When it comes to replying to messages, Shortwave almost resembles a messaging app more than an email app. Tap on the email that you want to reply to and, on the bottom of the screen, you’ll see the text field. tap on it and you’ll see a simple reply UI pop up.
In Shortwave, there are a ton of settings that you can use to customize your experience. To access your settings, tap on your profile picture on the bottom left of the screen. On the resulting screen, you’ll see the Settings button on the bottom. On the resulting page, you’ll see all of the categories that you can search through. We’ll go through the more notable settings. You can look through the settings to see the full list.

You’re able to change the system of the app. This will let you choose between light mode and dark mode.
A setting will let you reverse the inbox swipe gestures. You swipe left to pin emails and snooze them; you swipe right to mark them as done and delete them. This option will reverse this.
Remember the popup you get when you’re trying to snooze a conversation? The popup has preset options for how long you want to snooze your emails. Well, there’s a setting that will let you customize those presets.
If there are people sending you too many emails, you can block different senders. Lastly, you can choose which inboxes you want to be displayed.
With that, you know what you need to know about this new and useful email client.The post How to use Shortwave email appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

The PlayStation Plus catalog is getting one of 2021's best games

2021 had a slew of excellent games release across platforms, and one of those games was Lost Judgement, which is being added to the PlayStation Plus game catalog this month. It’s just one of a handful of games being added though, and hardly the only good one that players will get their hands on.
In addition to Lost Judgement, subscribers of PlayStation Plus will be getting access to two actually new games. Both Sea of Stars and Moving Out 2 are joining the game catalog for August. That being said, Sea of Stars doesn’t launch until August 29. Which is when it shows up in the catalog. All other games however, will show up on August 15. That means they’ll show up next Tuesday. As Tuesdays are when Sony does its PlayStation Plus updates.
Every game coming to the PlayStation Plus catalog besides Lost Judgement
As mentioned above Lost Judgement is but one of many new games being added to the catalog. There’s definitely more to look forward to if you like all different game genres. Or if you’re willing to try and expand your tastes.
Starting August 15, PlayStation Plus subscribers will also be able to play Destiny 2: The Witch Queen, Destroy All Humans 2 Reprobed, Two Point Hospital: Jumbo Edition, Source of Madness, Cursed to Golf, Dreams, PJ Masks: Heroes of the Night, Hotel Transylvania: Scary-Tale Adventures, Lawn Mowing Simulator: Landmark Edition, Spellforce III Reforced, and Midnight Fight Express. Worth noting is that Dreams is also currently one of the PlayStation Plus monthly games for August. So make sure to claim it there if you want to keep it. While it may be in the catalog now, it will likely leave the catalog someday. But PlayStation Plus monthly games are yours to keep if you always have the active subscription.
Another thing worth mentioning is that for access to the catalog, you have to have PlayStation Plus Extra or Premium. Whereas the monthly games only require PlayStation Plus Essential.
Dive into more classic games
If you’re a PlayStation Plus Premium subscriber, there’s more classic games for you to play too. There are three new classic titles coming. MediEvil: Resurrection, Ape Escape: On The Loose, and Pursuit Force: Extreme Justice. All of these will be playable on August 15 just like the titles from the Game Catalog.The post The PlayStation Plus catalog is getting one of 2021’s best games appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Galaxy Tab S9 FE Preview: Release date, specs, price & more

Along with its Galaxy Tab S series of tablets, Samsung also launches a series of FE tablets that offer a more mid-range experience. They’re for people who want a powerful tablet experience for a lower price. Well, the company is going to be selling the Galaxy Tab S9 FE tablets, and here’s a preview of these devices.
In this article, we’re going to go over the expected details for these tablets. We’ll go over the price, specs, release date, etc. As we get close to the official release, more information will flood in about these devices, so the article will be updated accordingly. Be sure to check back periodically to see what new information has been added.
How many models will there be?
So far, it’s strongly believed that there will be two models. We’re sure that both of these tablets will have mostly the same specs. The difference between the two models will mainly be the size. The smaller model is expected to be 10.9 inches and the other one could be 12.4 inches. The second model is the same size as the Galaxy Tab S9+.
As for the names, the names are expected to be the Galaxy Tab S9 FE and the Galaxy Tab S9 FE+.
How will these tablets look?
So far, it looks like both models of the tablets will have a similar look to what we got with the Galaxy Tab S9 tablets (you can pre-order them here). Based on some leaked images of these tablets, it looks like they will be made from matte metal that’s relatively reflective. On the back, we see a singular camera in the upper left corner. The antenna lines could sit on the top and bottom of the body and curve with the corners.

Looking at the front, there’s not much to see. We expect there to be one front-facing camera for video calls. Other than that, we see that the bezels are pretty sizable. They give the tablets a less premium look, but they’ll make it easier to grab them.
Will these tablets have a powerful processor?
The FE devices have had a history of using the previous year’s flagship processors, but that might not be the case this time around. When these tablets hit the FCC’s desk, we found out that Samsung might use the Exynos 1380 SoC.
That seems to be the Samsung equivalent of the Snapdragon 778. That’s an upper-mid-range processor. This means that you should expect really good performance, but you should also expect the occasional stutter or dropped frame while using it.
How much RAM will these tablets have?
We’re sure that there will be different RAM configurations, but that remains to be seen. However, rumors point to them starting at 6GB of RAM. That’s not bad for a mid-range tablet.
How much storage will these tablets have?
As for the storage, we believe that these tablets will start with 128GB of storage. We’re not sure if they will go up from there. If they do, then we don’t expect them to go higher than 256GB.
Will these tablets have the same screen found with the Galaxy Tab S9?
No. The Galaxy Tab S9 uses some very eye-catching Dynamic AMOLED 2X displays. The FE versions will use your run-of-the-mill LCD displays. We’re sure that it will still be a nice-looking panel.
What software will these tablets have?
Rumors point to the Galaxy Tab S9 FE running Android 13 out of the box with Samsung’s One UI 5. This could mean that they will launch within the next couple of months; sometime before the launch of Android 14 with One UI 6.
Will the Galaxy Tab S9 FE come with an S Pen included?
We don’t know 100%, but it seems possible. We, at least, know that they will be compatible with the Samsung-made stylus. In the leaked renders of the chassis, we see a magnetic strip on the back of the tablet. This is meant to hold and charge the S Pen. So, if the company doesn’t drop one in the box, you’ll be able to pick one up separately.
What battery capacities do these tablets have?
Right now, we don’t know the battery capacity for both models of the tablet. Rumor has it that the smaller model will come with an 8,400mAh battery. It makes sense that the 10.9-inch version has this capacity because the 11-inch variant of the Galaxy Tab S9 also has this capacity.
If that’s the case, then we should expect the 12.4-inch variant to have a capacity similar to the Galaxy Tab S9+’s. This tablet’s battery is 10,090mAh.
As for charging speeds, it looks like these tablets will cap out at 25W. That speed wouldn’t be too bad if the batteries were smaller. However, given how large the batteries are, charging them will take quite a while.
Will these tablets have microSD card expansion/headphone jack?
Based on the images, it doesn’t appear so. We will need to wait for further images to be sure. If these tablets do have these features, then they just don’t show up in the renders.
Will they have an IP rating?
Since the Galaxy Tab S9 series are all IP68 water and dust resistant, it’s tempting to think that Samsung trickled this technology into its FE models. At the moment, it doesn’t seem like the company did.
How much will these tablets cost?
The price of these tablets is expected to be pretty problematic. Rumor has it that the base Galaxy Tab S9 FE will start at ₹63,000 for the Indian price (about $760) for the 6GB/128GB variant. That’s a pretty bad price seeing as the base Galaxy Tab S9, which costs ₹73,000 ($880), starts with 8GB of RAM and 128GB of storage. It also has a much more powerful processor and a better display among other benefits.
When will these tablets launch?
Right now, we’re still in the dark about the release date. Previous rumors pointed to these tablets being unveiled along with the other Galaxy Tab S9 tablets, but that didn’t happen. However, rumor points to these tablets launching sometime within the next couple of months.The post Galaxy Tab S9 FE Preview: Release date, specs, price & more appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Apple Releases iOS 17 Public Beta 3

Apple has just seeded the third public beta for iOS 17, and this comes a day after the fifth developer beta was released by the company. So right on time. After this update, we should start to see weekly updates, until the Release Candidate or RC is released about a week ahead of the iPhone event. Basically, we’re in the home stretch now.
There’s a few changes here with this beta, likely the same changes we saw with the developer beta that was released yesterday. But nothing major. Most of the changes are going to be under-the-hood changes, and optimizations to help get this ready for the public release next month.
What’s new with iOS 17?
iOS 17 isn’t a huge update this year, but there are still a number of new features available. This includes StandBy. This is a new mode for your iPhone when it is plugged in or on a MagSafe dock and in landscape mode. It will show you the time, as well as other options for picture galleries, shortcuts to Home toggles and more.
The update also brings interactive widgets to the home screen and lock screen in iOS 17. Something that users have wanted for quite some time.
AirDrop is also bringing in some new features for iOS 17, which includes NameDrop. Now when you tap your phone with someone else’s, you can instantly provide your contact information. No more needing to hand out business cards, nor write down someone’s phone number. Speaking of phone numbers, iOS 17 also brings in Contact Posters. This is a customizable poster that others will see when you call them. This can include just text, or a memoji, or even a portrait of yourself.
iOS 17 should be launching for everyone on the week of September 18, so just a little over a month before it’s available for everyone.The post Apple Releases iOS 17 Public Beta 3 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Top 10 KB articles for PostgreSQL, VMware Tanzu Greenplum in July, 2023 

Tweet In the fast-paced world of database management, encountering issues is inevitable. That’s why we’ve compiled a list of the top 10 Knowledge Base (KB) articles that gained popularity in June. These articles serve as valuable resources for database administrators and users alike, offering step-by-step instructions and resolutions for a variety of challenges. By sharing … Continued

The post Top 10 KB articles for PostgreSQL, VMware Tanzu Greenplum in July, 2023  appeared first on VMware Support Insider.

Source: vmware

Galaxy Note 20 grabs Samsung's August 2023 update

Samsung has released the August 2023 security update for a couple more Galaxy devices. The Galaxy S20 FE 5G and Galaxy Note 20 series are the latest to get the new security patch. The company has already pushed the update to the Galaxy S23 series, Galaxy Z Fold 4, Galaxy Z Flip 4, and a few other models in some regions. The August SMR (Security Maintenance Release) contains fixes for more than 80 vulnerabilities.
The Galaxy S20 FE was the first Samsung device to pick up this month’s security update. The company began the rollout last week but only covered the 4G/LTE model initially. But now, it has expanded the rollout to the 5G model as well. As of this writing, the Galaxy S20 FE 5G is receiving the August SMR in Latin America, the same market where its 4G sibling got the update. A global release should follow in the coming days.
The updated firmware build number for the 5G version of this Fan Edition (FE) phone is G781BXXS7HWG9. First reported by SamMobile, the update is already live in Brazil, Colombia, Ecuador, Guatemala, Mexico, Panama, Paraguay, Trinidad and Tobago, and Uruguay. Samsung’s official changelog confirms that the device isn’t receiving anything more than the latest security fixes, which we will discuss in more detail shortly.
Meanwhile, Samsung is pushing those fixes to the Galaxy Note 20 and Galaxy Note 20 Ultra as well. The same publication reports that the update is available in Southeast European countries with the build number N98*FXXS8HWH3 and in China with N98*0ZSS6HWG8. It seems we are talking about 4G models in the former region and 5G models in the latter. A wider rollout should be just around the corner.
Samsung’s August 2023 update patches over 80 security issues in Galaxy devices
Samsung began rolling out the August SMR to Galaxy devices last week, but it hadn’t published the content of the patch back then. We now have the details, and it’s a pretty big one. The latest security release fixes more than 80 vulnerabilities in Galaxy devices. 86, to be precise. 51 of those are Android flaws coming from Google and partners (including two critical issues), while the remaining 35 are Galaxy-specific patches coming directly from Samsung.
As usual, Samsung has fixed issues across various system apps, services, and components in Galaxy devices with the August SMR. These include at least one critical flaw that allowed remote code execution on affected units. If you’re using a Galaxy smartphone, watch out for the latest security update in the coming days. You can manually check for new updates from the Settings app on your phone.The post Galaxy Note 20 grabs Samsung’s August 2023 update appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Valve now sells refurbished Steam Decks for a discount price

Valve is now selling refurbished Steam Decks, making them available at a less expensive price to anyone who still wants one. When Valve officially launched the Steam Deck back in 2022, it was already an affordable way to get into PC gaming. And not only affordable, but portable too. And to many people’s surprise, it actually plays games pretty well. So in all, Valve was offering something that was a really good value for PC gamers. Especially considering the prices of other handheld gaming PCs available at the time.
Now, these new refurbished Steam Decks make them even more affordable. So long as you’re ok with getting a certified refurbished unit instead of one that’s brand-new. As these are certified refurbished units straight from Valve, things should be completely fine. And even if they weren’t, Valve has had a pretty good track record of being very helpful to any customers who picked up a Steam Deck that had issues. The best part is the pricing, though.
Refurbished Steam Decks Save you up to $130
When it comes to the Steam Deck, $399 for the base model with 64GB of storage was already a good price. But if you buy the refurbished model, that price gets knocked down to $319. An $80 savings. The better deals though are with the 256GB and the 512GB models. You save $110 on the 256GB Deck with a price of $419 instead of $529. And the 512GB model comes down from $649 to $519.
In short, it might be worth considering the 512GB refurbished Deck. That is if you were already thinking of buying a new one and going for at least the 256GB model at full price. Having said all that, there’s an obvious caveat to buying a refurbished unit. There is the possibility that it could have minor damage. Such as scratches or scuffs. Most likely, though, all the pieces would be functional and you should have a fully working unit. But that price discount isn’t there for no reason.
So this is something worth keeping in mind if you decide to go for a refurbished model over a new one. If you’d like to pick up a refurbished Steam Deck, you can find them here at the official Steam store page.The post Valve now sells refurbished Steam Decks for a discount price appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Spotify's DJ is now available in more countries, but there's a catch

Earlier this year, Spotify unveiled its AI-generated DJ, and it’s a pretty neat idea. While it’s a couple of months old, it’s been in testing for the most part and limited to only a handful of countries. However, Spotify’s DJ is making it to 50 more countries. However, there’s a bit of a catch.
If you don’t know what the DJ is, here’s a quick rundown. Back in February, Spotify started testing a feature that would make it seem like you have your own private DJ. When you access it, you’d hear an AI-generated voice introduce and give commentary on recommended songs. The voice will give introductions tailored to the user, so it’ll feel like you have your own personal DJ.
If this is something that interests you, just know that you need a premium subscription to use it. Spotify Premium costs $10.99/month. This is after the recent price hike that the company went through.
Spotify’s DJ is making it to 50 more countries
When DJ launched, it was for testing, so the launch was limited. It launched in the US and made its way to the UK and Ireland. Now, with this expansion, it’s now available in more countries. This includes countries in Asia, Europe, and Africa. The DJ is also landing in Australia and New Zealand.
There are countries like the Bahamas, Canada, Jamaica, the Philippines, Samoa, South Africa, and Zimbabwe. If you want a complete list, you can check the page here.
Now, what’s the catch?
Spotify’s DJ is great, and it’s great that it’s available in 50 more countries, but that’s only if you can understand it. While it’s making its way into non-English-speaking countries, DJ is only available in English. So, people who don’t speak it are out of luck.
At this point, we don’t know if the company plans on bringing any other languages to the functionality. Hopefully, it does, because it’s a neat feature.The post Spotify’s DJ is now available in more countries, but there’s a catch appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Netflix games can be played on the TV using a new controller app

Netflix has reportedly created and launched a new Game Controller app that you can use to play its mobile games on the big screen. Appropriately named, Netflix Game Controller, the app provides that singular purpose. And acts as a means for letting you control its mobile games while playing on your TV screen.
It’s not quite the experience of playing console games, but should be nice for people who enjoy the Netflix game experience. Especially if they want to enjoy it with a larger display. Even more so if they’re playing a mobile game that might be multiplayer. Or if others simply want to watch. This makes it so that playing Netflix mobile games can be a social activity in a sense.
Naturally you’ll still need a Netflix account to play these games just as you would on the phone. Though that’s probably not a shock to anyone who already knew the games existed.
The Netflix Game Controller app isn’t available on Android yet

According to TechCrunch (via Droid Life), the app is available right now on iOS. Or it’s at the very least starting to show up in the App Store for some users. Android is another story. As it doesn’t appear to be available in the Play Store for now. Netflix hasn’t officially announced this new app or any details about an Android version. But an Android version is most likely coming soon. Given that the Netflix games are available on the Android platform.
Of course, when it arrives is unfortunately unclear. As for how it works, the setup looks pretty simple. There’s a virtual d-pad for movement and the ABXY buttons for all your in-game actions. The app is free and allows you to pair your phone or mobile device to the TV to use its screen as the controller. This isn’t the first time this tech has been used for such a purpose. It does make sense though that Netflix would eventually want to offer this feature considering how many people prefer to play games on bigger screens.The post Netflix games can be played on the TV using a new controller app appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Apple Music's New Feature Helps You Discover New Songs Based on Your Music Taste

Apple Music has rolled out a couple of new stations to help you discover new songs to add to your playlists. It’s aptly named “Discovery Station” and will play a curated list of music based on what you’ve been listening to lately. These will mostly be songs that you have not added to your library yet. So it’ll be helpful to find new music.
Apple Music has also changed the album art for your own station. It’s now in red, pink and orange, and has a similar look to the album art on the Discovery Station which is in green, blue and a sort of purple color.
The Discovery Station has rolled out, and it appears to be a server-side change, as there has not been an update to iOS to bring this feature, nor an update in the Play Store for the Android version. So everyone should have it on Apple Music now.
It does a decent job with Discovery
For a long time now, a big issue with Apple Music had been that it pretty much sucked with discovery. It would surface different radio stations and playlists. But trying to discover individual songs based on what you are already listening to, it didn’t do that well at all. However, this new Discovery Station does a pretty decent job, so far.
Will this help Apple Music catch up to Spotify? Prob